You are on page 1of 308

1

Service Manual
of the EDITOR HFe X-Ray generator's

Version 06220010

Released June 2015

Spellman High Voltage Electronics GmbH


Josef-Baumann-Straße 23
D-44805 Bochum
Telephone +49 (0)234 87906-0
Fax +49 (0)234 87906-11
E-Mail info@spellmanhv.de
Information EDITOR HFe X-Ray generator

this documentation is a part of the


X-ray generator:
generator model EDITOR HFe
high-voltage generator S.N.
model S.N. manufacturer
tube 1
tube 2
measuring chamber 1
measuring chamber 2
measuring chamber 3
measuring chamber 4
DAP chamber 1
DAP chamber 2

installation date (system)


name / address of the installer

manufacturer Spellman High Voltage Electronics GmbH


Josef-Baumann-Straße 23
D-44805 Bochum, Germany
telephone +49 (0)234 87906-0
fax +49 (0)234 87906-11
Email info@spellmanhv.de
service office

Exchanged parts model S.N. manufacturer

classification pursuant to class IIb


Directive 93/42/EWG
classification pursuant to IEC type B
60601-1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2
Contents
A. List of Figures 13

B. List of Tables 2

C. General information 3
a. Description 4
b. Definitions and Notations 5
c. Intended purpose 6

D. Safety Information 7
a. Radiation Safety 8
b. Manufacturer's safety 9
c. Operator's/Service Personnel Safety 10
d. Electrical Safety 11
e. Protection against Electrical Shock 12

E. Compliance 13

E.1 RoHS Compliance Statement 14

F. Classifications as per IEC60601-1 27

1 INTRODUCTION 2-1

1.1 Dimensions and Weights 2-2

1.2 Important Labels 2-12

1.3 EDITOR HFe Generators Technical Data 2-17


1.3.1 Input current 2-19

1.4 Specification for Radiography 2-20


1.4.1 Exposure techniques 2-20
1.4.2 Loading factors of the tube 2-20

1.5 Power Supply Requirements 2-21


1.5.1 Line Voltage 2-21
1.5.2 Supply Cable 2-21
1.5.3 Environmental Conditions 2-22

1.6 Required Tools and Measuring Instruments 2-22

2 INSTALLATION 3-1

2.1 X-ray generator room preparation 3-2


2.1.1 Power supply cable 3-2
2.1.2 Generator fusing (F1) 3-2
2.1.3 Control fuse (F2) 3-2
2.1.4 Installation switch / Emergency OFF switch (S0) 3-2
2.1.5 Main contactor (K1) 3-3

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3
2.1.6 Current-operated earth-leakage circuit-breaker (F3) 3-3
2.1.7 Main neutral point bar (N) 3-3
2.1.8 Main safety earth bar (PE) 3-3
2.1.9 Transfer terminal block (X1) 3-3

2.2 System overview 3-6


2.2.1 HFe Generators Modules and electronic boards 3-6
2.2.2 Connecting cables 3-8
2.2.2.1 Connecting cables Radiography generator 3-8
2.2.2.2 Connecting cables Fluoroscopy generator 3-10
2.2.3 List of HFe Generator Medical Devices/Assemblies Compatibility 3-12

2.3 Mechanical installation 3-15


2.3.1 Before installation: 3-15
2.3.2 Fixing the power cabinet 3-15

2.4 Electrical installation 3-16


2.4.1 Connection Points Overview 3-16
2.4.1.1 Sub distribution 3-16
2.4.2 Mains connection 3-17
2.4.2.1 Connection to 400VAC Mains voltage 3-17
2.4.2.2 Connections to mains voltage 400/480V Y or Delta Distribution Line option 3-17
2.4.2.3 Connections to mains voltage 420VAC-480VAC option (Autotransformer) 3-20
2.4.2.4 Connections to mains voltage 208V Y option (Autotransformer) 3-23
2.4.3 Installation of the high voltage transformer 3-25
2.4.4 Removing the optional pressure control valve 3-26
2.4.5 High Voltage Cables 3-27
2.4.6 Connecting the stator cable and thermo contact cable 3-27
2.4.7 Principal function diagram of the tube stator connection 3-30
2.4.8 Connecting the control panel 3-31
2.4.9 Connecting the optional Touch panel 3-31
2.4.10 Connecting the optional interface box 3-32
2.4.11 Connecting the Dose Area Product meter DAP (optional) 3-32
2.4.12 Connecting the VacuDAPduo (optional) 3-33
2.4.13 Connecting the HSS2 (optional) 3-33

3 Generator setup 4-37

3.1 Power on test 4-38

3.2 Setup 4-38


3.2.1 Introduction to the configuration software of the generator 4-39
3.2.1.1 Required Equipment 4-39
3.2.1.2 Preparing of the service PC 4-39
3.2.2 Backup the generator settings 4-41
3.2.2.1 Generator settings 4-42

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4
3.2.3 Setup of the internal time 4-42
3.2.4 X-Ray Tube Setup via software 4-44
3.2.5 Tube calibrationj via setup software 4-44
3.2.5.1 Genera linformation on tube calibration overview 4-48
3.2.6 Tube connection check 4-45
3.2.7 Semi-automatic tube calibration 4-46
3.2.7.1 Tube Calibration overview 4-48
3.2.7.2 Description of the semi-automatic tube calibration 4-49
3.2.8 Tube calibration with the service software - step by step 4-52
3.2.9 Tube calibration via control panel - step by step 4-67
3.2.9.1 Description of the control panel display during calibration 4-67
3.2.10 Possible errors during calibration 4-73

4 Error Handling 5-1

4.1 Warning signals and error messages 5-2


4.1.1 Acoustic signals 5-2
4.1.2 Optical Indication signals 5-2
4.1.3 Error messages 5-2
4.1.4 Table of error messages 5-2

4.2 Potential cause for Error and handling solutions 5-5

5 Anatomic Programmed Radiography 6-1

5.1 Anatomic Programmed Radiography (APR) 6-2

5.2 Change the parameters via control panel 6-2

5.3 Change the parameters via the service program 6-2


5.3.1 Organ program x 6-3
5.3.2 Device (0-6): 6-3
5.3.3 Focus (1,2): 6-3
5.3.4 Exposure mode: 6-3
5.3.5 Exposure kV (40-150): 6-3
5.3.6 Exposure mAs (0.5-600): 6-3
5.3.7 Exposure mAs (10-800): 6-3
5.3.8 Exposure ms (1-6300): 6-3
5.3.9 AEC fields (L,C,R): 6-3
5.3.10 AEC screen (1-3): 6-3
5.3.11 AEC gray level (+/-4): 6-3
5.3.12 FFD cm (50-400): 6-3
5.3.13 Object cm (1-99): 6-4
5.3.14 Colli pos. (0-200): 6-4
5.3.15 Reduced Power 6-4
5.3.16 Cut 6-4

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5
5.3.17 Copy 6-4
5.3.18 Paste 6-4
5.3.19 Accept 6-4
5.3.20 Region x 6-4
5.3.21 Region start: 6-4
5.3.22 Region end: 6-4
5.3.23 Region body table: 6-4
5.3.24 Accept 6-4

5.4 Use separate APR text file 6-7


5.4.1 Declaration 6-7
5.4.2 Example of an APR text file 6-8

6 Control Panel 7-2

6.1 Overview 7-3

6.2 Function of the buttons 7-6

6.3 Service program of the control panel 7-8

7 Printed circuit boards and modules 8-1

7.1 Filament heating board HZG1 8-2


7.1.1 Jumper HZG1 8-3
7.1.2 Potentiometer HZG1 8-3
7.1.3 LEDs indication HZG1 8-3
7.1.4 Test points HZG1 8-3
7.1.5 Fuses HZG1 8-3

7.2 Interface and starter board NAG2 8-4


7.2.1 Connector NAG2 8-5
7.2.2 Jumper NAG2 8-5
7.2.3 LED indication NAG2 8-6
7.2.4 Test points NAG2 8-6
7.2.5 Fuses NAG2 8-6

7.3 Central controller board ZST2 8-7


7.3.1 Jumper ZST2 8-8
7.3.2 Switch ZST2 8-9
7.3.3 Potentiometer ZST2 8-9
7.3.4 LED indication ZST2 8-9
7.3.5 Test points ZST2 8-10
7.3.6 ZST2 Battery replacement procedure: 8-11

7.4 Inverter driver board ANS2 8-12


7.4.1 Connectors ANS2 8-13
7.4.2 LED indication ANS2 8-13

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6
7.4.3 Test points ANS2 8-13
7.4.4 Fuses ANS2 8-13

7.5 Inverter fans (fluoroscopy option only) 8-14


7.5.1 Cooling fans 8-14
7.5.2 Functionality of the fans 8-14
7.5.3 Attention 8-14
7.5.4 Connections 8-14

8 Maintenance and Service 9-1

8.1 Regular Maintenance/Repair 9-2


8.1.1 Generator components replacement 9-2

8.2 Schedule Maintenance: 9-6


8.2.1 Annual inspections/checks: 9-6
8.2.2 Reproducibility and Linearity 9-6
8.2.3 Replacement Parts Modules and electronic boards. 9-11

8.3 Fuses Editor HFe 9-11


8.3.1 Replacement of fuses: 9-11
8.3.2 Fuse tables 9-12

9 Options 10-15

9.1 Generator interface board NAG2 10-16


9.1.1 Introduction 10-16
9.1.2 Description of the device interface board NAG2 10-17
9.1.2.1 Front view NAG2 10-17
9.1.2.2 View component side NAG2 10-18
9.1.2.3 Connector pin assignment NAG2 (Standard version) 10-19
9.1.2.4 Additional connectors with maximum assembly (Option Bucky 3 und 4) 10-20
9.1.2.5 Jumper settings NAG2 (Default 24VDC) 10-21
9.1.2.5.1 Description of the jumpers 10-22
9.1.2.5.2 Description of the wire jumpers 10-23
9.1.2.5.3 24V DC internal interface voltage (default) 10-23
9.1.2.5.4 24V AC external interface voltage 10-24
9.1.2.5.5 230V AC interface voltage 10-24

9.2 Fluoroscopy Interface 10-25


9.2.1 General information 10-25
9.2.2 IFF1 Overview of the LEDs, Jumpers and connectors 10-27
9.2.2.1 Positions of the LEDs, jumpers and connectors 10-27
9.2.2.2 LEDs of the IFF1 10-28
9.2.2.3 Jumpers and switches 10-29
9.2.2.4 Potentiometers 10-29
9.2.2.5 Test points 10-29

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7
9.2.3 UNI1 Overview of the LEDs, Jumpers and connectors 10-30
9.2.3.1 Positions of the LEDs, jumpers and connectors 10-30
9.2.3.2 LED UNI1 10-31
9.2.3.3 Jumper UNI1 10-31
9.2.3.4 Test points 10-32
9.2.3.5 Connectors 10-33
9.2.4 Signal description in- and output 10-34
9.2.4.1 Digital inputs 10-34
9.2.4.1.1 Low / high active inputs 10-34
9.2.4.1.2 Signal description 10-34
9.2.4.2 Digital outputs 10-35
9.2.4.2.1 Low / high active output 10-35
9.2.4.2.2 Signal description 10-35
9.2.4.3 Analog inputs 10-36
9.2.4.3.1 Analog input on the board UNI1 10-36
9.2.4.3.2 Signal description 10-36
9.2.4.3.3 Galvanic isolated input amplifier on the board IFF1 10-37
9.2.5 Hardware settings for a standard TV system 10-37
9.2.5.1 Jumper settings IFF1 standard 10-38
9.2.5.2 Jumper settings UNI1 standard 10-39
9.2.5.3 Interfacing a standard TV-chain system 10-40
9.2.5.3.1 Block diagram 10-41
9.2.5.3.2 Timing diagram continuous fluoroscopy 10-42
9.2.5.3.3 Timing diagram for exposure 10-43
9.2.6 Software settings 10-44
9.2.6.1 Fluoroscopy “device settings” 10-44
9.2.6.2 Fluoroscopy “X-ray device settings” 10-45
9.2.6.3 Fluoroscopy “KV-control settings” 10-46
9.2.6.3.1 Automatic brightness control via the analog inputs “ABC_C_1” and “ABC_C_2” 10-47
9.2.6.3.2 Automatic brightness control by the digital inputs “KV_UP” and “KV_DOWN” 10-48
9.2.6.4 Test function of the interface IFF1 10-49

9.3 The high speed starter HSS1 10-50


9.3.1 Important information 10-50
9.3.2 Function description 10-51
9.3.3 Overview of the hardware 10-52
9.3.3.1 Overview of the high speed starter module 10-52
9.3.3.2 External connectors 10-52
9.3.3.2.1 X6 Tube 1 10-52
9.3.3.2.2 X9 Tube 2 (Not available in HSS1 Option 1) 10-53
9.3.3.2.3 X17 Mains 10-53
9.3.3.2.4 X2 and X15 CAN-BUS 10-53
9.3.4 Overview of the PCB HSS1 10-54

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8
9.3.4.1 Standard version 10-54
9.3.4.2 Option 1 version 10-54
9.3.4.3 Light emitting diodes LED 10-55
9.3.4.4 Potentiometer 10-55
9.3.4.5 Switches 10-56
9.3.4.6 Jumpers 10-56
9.3.4.7 Wired jumpers 10-56
9.3.4.7.1 Phase shift capacitor for Tube 1 10-56
9.3.4.7.2 Phase shift capacitor for Tube 2 10-56
9.3.4.7.3 Stator operating voltage 10-56
9.3.4.7.4 Factory setup connections 10-56
9.3.4.8 Test points 10-57
9.3.5 Assembly of the HSS1 module 10-58
9.3.6 Hardware settings for Standard version 10-59
9.3.7 Hardware settings for Option 1 version 10-59
9.3.7.1 Hardware settings on the HSS1 10-60
9.3.7.1.1 Dip switch S3 10-60
9.3.7.1.2 X3 wired jumper (UZK value selector) 10-61
9.3.7.1.3 Jumper JP1, Potentiometer R44 10-61
9.3.7.1.4 Wired jumper for phase shift capacitor connection 10-61
9.3.7.2 Separate hardware settings for each tube 10-62
9.3.7.2.1 Dip switch S1 (tube1) and S2 (tube2) (separate settings for each tube) 10-62
9.3.7.2.2 Function of the DIP switch S1 and S2 10-62
9.3.7.2.3 Settings of the pulse width during braking 10-63
9.3.7.2.4 Settings of the start frequency of the high speed start 10-63
9.3.7.2.5 Settings of the end frequency of the high speed start after 1s 10-63
9.3.8 Software settings 10-64
9.3.8.1 Device settings 10-65
9.3.8.2 Tube settings 10-66
9.3.8.2.1 Tube settings for high speed rotation 10-67
9.3.8.2.2 Continuous running 10-68
9.3.8.2.3 Multiple exposures during continuous running 10-68
9.3.9 Error handling 10-69
9.3.9.1 Error Status LED 10-69
9.3.9.2 Error No. 1 10-69
9.3.9.3 Error No. 2 10-70
9.3.9.4 Error No. 3 10-70
9.3.9.5 Error No. 4 10-70

9.4 BA6: Automatic exposure control (analog) 10-71


9.4.1 Hardware and Software Configuration 9-100
9.4.1.1 Compatible Measuring Chambers 9-101
9.4.1.1.1 Type A 9-102

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9
9.4.1.1.2 Type B 9-103
9.4.1.1.3 Type C 9-104
9.4.1.1.4 Type D 9-105
9.4.1.2 Jumper settings for Measuring Chamber VACUTEC BAK70145 / 14500 42, 43,04 10-72
9.4.1.3 Pin Assignment on BA6 10-73
9.4.1.4 Jumper Settings on BA6 10-74
9.4.1.5 Jumper settings on ZST2 10-76
9.4.1.6 Software Parameters for BA6 10-76
9.4.2 Preparation for Adjustment 10-77
9.4.2.1 Required Equipment 10-77
9.4.2.2 Measurement Set-up 10-77
9.4.2.3 Adjustment mode 10-78
9.4.2.4 Adjustment of the measuring chamber 10-79
9.4.2.4.1 Select Type of Chamber 10-80
9.4.2.4.2 Adjustment of the measuring chamber 10-80
9.4.2.5 Preadjustment by measuring the Dose 10-81
9.4.2.6 Fine Adjustment by measuring Film Density 10-81
9.4.2.7 Beam quality 10-81
9.4.2.8 Correction of measuring fields 10-82
9.4.2.9 Swapping measuring Fields according to spatial Orientation 10-83
9.4.2.10 Pulsed Exposure Settings 10-84
9.4.3 kV-Compensation 10-85
9.4.3.1 Preparations 10-85
9.4.3.2 Preadjustment using Dose Measurements 10-86
9.4.3.3 Fine Adjustment measuring Film density 10-86
9.4.3.4 Safety Termination 10-87
9.4.3.5 Startphase 10-87
9.4.3.6 Store Settings 10-87
9.4.3.7 Setting normal Mode 10-88
9.4.4 Error Messages 10-89
9.4.4.1 Error messages on the control panel 10-89
9.4.4.2 Status indication and error messages on the BA6 10-89
9.4.5 Overview BA6 10-91
9.4.5.1 Jumper settings camber type A 10-92
9.4.5.2 Jumper settings camber type B 10-93
9.4.5.3 Jumper settings chamber type C 10-94
9.4.5.4 Jumper settings chamber type D 10-95

9.5 BA7: Automatic Exposure Control (digital) 10-96


9.5.1 Hardware and Software Configuration 10-96
9.5.1.1 Compatible Measuring Chambers 10-96
9.5.1.2 Jumper settings at Measuring Chamber VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 1450045 / 70139 10-96
9.5.1.3 Pin Assignment on BA7 10-97

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10
9.5.1.4 Jumper Settings on BA7 10-97
9.5.1.5 Jumper settings on ZST2 10-98
9.5.1.6 Software Parameters for BA7 10-98
9.5.2 Preparation for Adjustment 10-100
9.5.2.1 Required Equipment 10-100
9.5.2.2 Measurement Set-up 10-101
9.5.2.3 Adjustment mode 10-102
9.5.2.3.1 Adjustment of the measuring chamber 10-103
9.5.2.4 Select Type of Chamber (not used for BA7) 10-103
9.5.2.5 Adjustment of the measuring chamber 10-104
9.5.2.5.1 Pre-adjustment by measuring the dose 10-104
9.5.2.5.2 Fine Adjustment by measuring film density 10-105
9.5.2.5.3 Beam quality 10-105
9.5.2.5.4 Correction of measuring fields 10-106
9.5.2.5.5 Orientation of the measuring field with respect to the direction of the beam 10-107
9.5.2.5.6 Setting pulsed Exposure 10-108
9.5.3 kV compensation 10-109
9.5.3.1 Preparations 10-109
9.5.3.2 Pre-adjustment using Dose Measurements 10-110
9.5.3.3 Fine Adjustment measuring film density 10-110
9.5.4 Safety termination 10-111
9.5.5 Start phase 10-111
9.5.6 Store Settings 10-112
9.5.7 Setting normal mode 10-112
9.5.8 AEC service settings via the setup program 10-113
9.5.8.1 The “AEC service settings” menu item 10-113
9.5.8.2 “Screen kV compensation (1-250%)” 10-113
9.5.8.3 “Chamber settings” 10-113
9.5.8.3.1 “Screen 1 (1-80)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.2 “Screen 2 (1-80)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.3 “Screen 3 (1-80)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.4 “Screen 4 (1-80)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.5 “Screen 5 (1-80)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.6 “Field l (0-15)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.7 “Field r (0-15)” 10-114
9.5.8.3.8 “Grey level (±3)” 10-1140
9.5.8.3.9 “Field swap” 10-1141
9.5.8.3.10 “Pulsed exp.” 10-1142
9.5.8.3.11 “Integr. ch.” 10-1143
9.5.8.4 “Time corr. (0-2.0ms)” 10-1144
9.5.8.5 “Dose test (0-50%)” 10-1145
9.5.9 “Read from AEC” 10-1146

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 11
9.5.10 “Write to AEC” 10-1147
9.5.11 Error Messages 10-115

9.6 The Control Interface Board with Mini Console 10-119

9.6.1 Connector Interface 9-140

9.6.2 Jumper Interface 9-141

9.6.3 LED indication Interface 9-142

9.6.4 Test points Interface 9-143

9.6.5 Switch Interface 9-144

9.6.6 Fuses Interface 9-145

9.6.7 GUI Control “Graphical User Interface” 9-146

9.7 Mini Control Console Interface 10-128

9.8 The high speed starter HSS2 10-132


9.8.1 Function description 9-149
9.8.2 Overview of the hardware 9-150
9.8.2.1 Overview of the high speed starter module 9-151
9.8.2.2 Rear View 9-152
9.8.3 Overview of the PCB HSS2 9-153
9.8.3.1 Light emitting diodes LED 9-154
9.8.3.2 Switches 9-155
9.8.3.3 Jumpers 9-156
9.8.3.4 Test Points 9-157
9.8.4 Assembly of the HSS2 module 9-158
9.8.5 Device Settings 9-159
9.8.6 Error handling 9-160
9.8.6.1 Error Status LED 9-161

9.9 The Pre-transformer option Error! Bookmark not defined.

9.10 The Aux-transformer option 10-145

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 12
A. List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 2-2 Editor HFe Cabinet 3-6
Figure 2-3: Cable overview radiography generator 3-8
Figure 2-4: Cable overview fluoroscopy generator 3-10
Figure 2-5: Position of the mounting holes 3-15
Figure 2-6 Connections to the sub distribution 3-16
Figure 2-7 Integrated version of a pre-transformer in a 97cm cabinet. 3-20
Figure 2-8 Pre-transformer built in separate 70cm cabinet (optional). 3-21
Figure 2-9 : Connection of Tube PE 3-28
Figure 2-10: Connection diagram of the Tube stator 3-30
Figure 2-11: Connector control panel 3-31
Figure 2-12 Touch panel 3-31
Figure 2-13: Connector digital interface box 3-32
Figure 2-14: ZST2 print screen (DAP meter) 3-33
Figure 2-15: ZST2 print screen (VacuDAPduo) 3-33
Figure 6-1: Standard Control Panel 7-3
Figure 6-2: Fluoroscopy Control Panel 7-4
Figure 6-3: FLXIS Control Panel 7-5
Figure 7-1: HZG1 print screen 8-2
Figure 7-2: NAG2 print screen 8-4
Figure 7-3: ZST2 print screen 8-7
Figure 7-4: ANS2 print screen 8-12
Figure 7-5: Fan assembly module 8-14
Figure 9-1: Simplified diagram of the IFF1 10-27
Figure 9-2: Simplified diagram of the UNI1 10-30
Figure 9-3: Default jumper settings IFF1 10-38
Figure 9-4: Default jumper settings UNI1 10-39
Figure 9-5: The tube current control curve depending on tube voltage during fluoroscopy 10-46
Figure 9-6: Test functions IFF1 10-49
Figure 9-7: Measurement set-up to adjust the AEC. 10-77
Figure 9-8: PHILIPS measuring chamber, Orientation of the measuring fields in the direction of the beam10-
83
Figure 9-9: VACUTEC measuring chamber, Orientation of the measuring fields in the direction of the beam
10-83
Figure 9-10: Connecting the measuring chambers 10-91
Figure 9-11: 5-field chamber field layout. 10-100
Figure 9-12: Measurement set-up to adjust the AEC. 10-101
Figure 9-13: VACUTEC measuring chamber, Orientation of the measuring fields in direction of the beam
10-107
Figure 9-14: BA7 type A 10-117
Figure 9-15: BA7 type B 10-118

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 13
B. List of Tables
Table 1-1: Important Labels and their positions on the cabinet 2-14
Table 1-2: Technical data of EDITOR HFe 2-17
Table 1-3: Input current 2-19
Table 1-4: Input line voltage 2-21
Table 1-5: Transport – storage conditions 2-22
Table 1-6: Operating conditions 2-22
Table 1-7: Tools required for installation. 2-22
Table 2-1: Generator fusing 3-2
Table 2-2: Earth leakage circuit breaker 3-3
Table 2-3: List of cables of the radiography generator 3-9
Table 2-4: List of cables of the fluoroscopy generator 3-11
Table 2-5: Compatible tubes 3-13
Table 3-1: Expected mAs values 4-49
Table 4-1: Error handling 5-14
Table 5-1: Body adjustment tables. 6-6
Table 6-1: Overview of the functions of the pushbuttons 7-8
Table 6-2: Overview of the functions of the keys 7-10
Table 8-1: Reproducibility measurement table 9-7
Table 8-2: Calculation of linearity 9-8
Table 8-3: Test Parameter Assignment Table, 3-Point-Technique 9-9
Table 8-4: Test Parameter Assignment Table, 2-Point-Technique 9-10
Table 9-1: Pin assignment connector measuring chamber-AEC, 9-pole D-SUB 10-73
Table 9-2: Pin assignment connection cable chamber type C, 9-pole D-SUB 10-73
Table 9-3: Jumper settings on BA6 10-76
Table 9-4: Software parameters for BA6 10-76
Table 9-5: Main menu adjustment of AEC. 10-78
Table 9-6: Context menu: adjustment of measuring chamber. 10-79
Table 9-7: Expected dose to achieve best images, depending on the film-screen-system. 10-81
Table 9-8: Spatial orientation and measuring fields 10-83
Table 9-9: Error codes displayed on the control panel 10-89
Table 9-10: Error messages indicated by LEDs on the BA6 (Binary Coding). 10-90
Table 9-11: Pin assignment AEC measuring chamber connector, 8-pole RJ45 10-97
Table 9-12: Pin assignment AEC measuring chamber connector, 15-pole sub-D 10-97
Table 9-13: Jumper settings on BA7 10-98
Table 9-14: Software parameters for BA7 (*only selectable using BA7 type B) 10-99
Table 9-15: BA7 type B field selection. 10-100
Table 9-16: Main menu adjustment of AEC. 10-102
Table 9-17: Context menu: adjustment of measuring chamber. 10-103
Table 9-18: Expected dose to achieve best images, depending on the film-screen-system. 10-104
Table 9-19: Error codes displayed on the control panel 10-115
Table 9-20: Error LEDs on BA7 10-115

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 14
Table 9-21: LEDs on BA7 10-116

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 15
C. General information

a. Description
This technical description contains installation and calibration instructions, component part lists and circuit
diagrams. Additional documents may be provided by manufacture. Please contact manufacture.

b. Definitions and Notations

The manual uses the following references for hazards/warnings and peculiarities:

WARNING

This reference is used if a failure to obey the instructions, notes or procedures or a failure to follow them
precisely can lead to injury or lethal accidents.

CAUTION
This reference is used if a failure to obey the instructions, notes or procedures or a failure to follow them
precisely can lead to damage to the equipment or external accessories.

NOTE
This reference is used to draw attention to peculiarities.

Warning symbol (yellow background) used to indicate a potential hazard to operators,


service personnel or to the equipment.

This symbol (yellow background) is used to warn against hazardous electrical voltage

Mandatory to read the user/service manual, before servicing the generator

This symbol warns against moving parts (fans, fluoroscopy option only)

c. Intended purpose
The HFe Generator intended to be used in medical X-Ray diagnostic / image guidance systems. It is part of
an X-ray system. It provides power to the x-ray tubes. In addition it provides interfaces for x-ray imaging
system, and interface to DAP, AEC ion chamber, and other accessories.

The operation is only allowed by personnel trained/knowledge in X-ray imaging and after reading and
understanding the user manual.

The generator may only be used within medical x-ray rooms and within the rated ambient parameters (see
Chapter 4.5)

The device may not be operated in areas where combustion may be a risk. It shall not be operated near
flammable liquids, flammable anesthetics, disinfecting agents, aerosols spray, or in oxygen-rich environment.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 16
D. Safety Information

a. Radiation Safety
X-ray equipment generates ionizing radiation, which is potentially hazardous to the patient, operator and
service personnel. If not properly used, the x-ray equipment may be dangerous. Due to the potentially
adverse effects of ionizing radiation, the following recommendations should be read and understood before
attempting to operate this x-ray equipment.

b. Manufacturer's safety
The x-ray equipment was designed to comply with the recommendations of the United States Center for
devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) as specified in the Code of Federal Regulations Title 21, the
Standards for Medical Devices of the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 60601-1 and Council
Directive 93/42/EEC of the European Commission.
Although this equipment incorporates protection against other x-radiation than the useful imaging beam, a
practical design does not provide complete protection. The equipment's design does not compel the
operators or assistants to take the necessary precautions, nor does it prevent the possibility of improper use.

c. Operator's/Service Personnel Safety


Only authorized and properly trained individuals should operate this equipment. All individuals authorized to
use this equipment must be aware of the danger of excessive exposure to radiation. In addition, it is
important that all authorized personnel are familiar with the regulatory standards in their country.
One of the recommendations of the guidelines is that doses be kept As Low As Reasonably Achievable
(ALARA). Patient dose should be kept as low as possible without compromising the quality of the procedure.
Authorized operators should avoid exposure to the primary beam at all times. Any object in the path of the
primary beam produces secondary or scattered radiation. Protective measures should be taken to safeguard
against secondary radiation.
Only properly trained service personnel can service or calibrate the HFe generator. There are parts inside
that generator that can cause injury to service personnel if not properly handled.( electrical, and others)

d. Electrical Safety
All of the movable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and routinely
inspected in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations contained in the present manual.
The equipment is not serviceable and access to the internal parts is prohibited. Live electrical terminals are
deadly; be sure that line disconnect switches are opened and other appropriate precautions are taken before
attaching accessories.
Do not remove the flexible H. T. cables from the X-ray tube housing or the anode / cathode assemblies H.T.
connector while the generator is on. Wait until the electrical mains have been disconnected for at least 1
minute.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 17
WARNING
Even if the generator is shut off, parts on the inside of the generator cabinet
and connected controls are still powered! Ensure that only trained service
personnel open the generator cabinet and the housing of connected devices,
when the system is totally free from electric tension and currentless! To
provide this x-ray rooms must have a mains' power switch. The x-ray
equipment should be switched off at the end of a working day using the
mains' power switch. Improper handling may cause lethal hazards!

e. Protection against Electrical Shock


The equipment conforms to protection IEC 60601-1 class I. All conductive parts that can be touched are
connected to the ground connector on the line side. HFe Generator under the table (HFeU) must be used
only when it is installed inside radiographic table in order to comply with 60601-1 protection against electric
shock. HFeU generator can’t be used standalone by itself.

E. Compliance
The EDITOR HFe complies with the following main standards, directives, and regulations:
Europe:
rd nd
EN 60601-1 / IEC 60601-1 (3 Edition and 2 Edition)
EN 60601-1-2 / IEC 60601-1-2
nd
EN 60601-1-4 / IEC 60601-1-4 (2 Edition)
nd
IEC 60601-2-54 and EN 60601-2-7 / IEC 60601-2-7 (2 Edition)

E.1 RoHS Compliance Statement


The European Union has established requirements for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) in all
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) and in effect is now the new RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS
II).
Certification of Compliance:
Spellman High Voltage Electronics- HVE certifies that to its knowledge the X-ray Generator Editor HFe
product list conform to the requirements of the European Union’s Restriction on Use of Hazardous
Substances in EEE RoHS II Directive, 2011/65/EU which may or may not include exemptions in the directive.
Declaration of Conformity (DoC)/ Technical File Documentation:
To comply with RoHS II, all CE marked products require a DoC and that a technical file be made available
upon request. For finished EEE goods where Spellman HVE is the legal manufacturer, Spellman HVE will
provide the DoC and the technical documentation.
Based on our own internal analyses, vendor supplied analyses and/ or material certifications of the raw
materials used in the manufacture of Spellman HVE X-ray Generator Editor HFe products, we declare that all
products currently comply with and conform to RoHS regulations.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 18
F. Classifications as per IEC60601-1
- The X-ray generator EDITOR HFe conforms to protection class 1.

Class I equipment
According to the class of equipment, the Editor HFe X-ray generator must be
connected to an earth ground by a protective earth conductor. Failure to
provide a separate earth ground can result in electrical shock hazard causing
injury or death.
- The applied part of the generator is Type B

FDA Warning:
Warning: This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe
exposure factors, operating instructions and maintenance schedules are
observed.

Warning: Fans exist in the fluoroscopy generator.


Caution: The fans turn ON without any notice when temperature on the power unit heat sink reaches
more than 50 degree Celsius.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 19
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 Dimensions and Weights

X-ray Generator cabinet under table (steel):


[12.20 in]

[16.93 in] [35.43 in]

The weight values apply to the standard equipment without any options.

Caution!
Do not block
ventilation screen

WARNING
X-ray Generator cabinet under table HFeU must be used only when it is
installed inside X-Ray table. HFeU generator can’t be used standalone by
itself.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-2
X-ray Generator cabinet 70cm:
[27.95 in]

[17.91 in]

Dimensions: [cm] Weight


Height: Width: Depth: [Kg]
70 53 45 97 [213.85 lb]
The weight values apply to the standard
equipment without any options.

Caution!
Always leave
ventilation screen free

[21.65 in]

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-3
X-Ray Generator cabinet 97cm:
[38.19 in]

[6.69 in]

[18.90 in]
[1.57 in] [17.72 in]

Dimensions: [cm] Weight


Height: Width: Depth: [Kg]
97 55 49 121 [266.76 lb]
The weight values apply to the standard
equipment without any options.

Caution!
Always leave
ventilation screen free [21.65 in]

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-4
X-ray Generator Fluoroscopy 97cm Cabinet:

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-5
X-ray Generator Fluoroscopy 97cm Cabinet:

Dimension: [cm] Weight


Height: Width:
Depth: [Kg]

121[266.76
97 55 49
lb]
Control Panel 4 [8.82 lb]
[38.19 in]

The weights specified apply for the


standard equipment without
options.
[7.09 in]

[1.57 in] [17.72 in] [18.90 in]

CAUTION!!
Always leave
ventilation screen
free!!!
[21.65 in]

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-6
X-ray Generator cabinet 110cm

[43.31 in]
[2.56 in]

[0.79 in] [11.02 in]


[11.81 in]

[21.65 in]

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-7
X-ray Generator cabinet under table 400V/480V (aluminum):

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-8
HFeS Generator Cabinet

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-9
Standard control Panel

[ in]

[25.56 in]
Weight: 4kg [8.82lb]

[17.32 in]

Option “Touch panel”


[7.87 in]

[1.97 in]
Weight: 1kg [2.20 lb]
[10.63 in]

Option “Interface Box”

[13.03 in]
[10.55 in]

[2.87 in]

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-10
Option “Mini Console”

Note: only available with interface board (IFC1)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-11
2.2 Important Labels

Label position 96cm Cabinet (other cabinets are labeled in the same manner)

Label position under table generator (steel)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-12
Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX
EDITOR HFe page 2-13
Number Type Position on the generator cabinet
1 Name plate of the generator Left, on the outside of the cabinet
1a Label of the pretransformer variation Left, on the outside of the cabinet
and the mains voltage
2 Internal label with electrical data Inside, on the right side behind the upper
electronic rack.
3 Indication of the HV transformer Inside, on front of the HV-transformer
4 Warning label On the top
5 Warning label Front wall of each single generator near the
screws.
6 High voltage warning label Converter, HV transformer, PCB boards
7 Label with reference to the fuse table Inside the cabinet
inside of the technical manual
8 Moving fans inside warning label Converter of fluoroscopy generators
Table 1-1: Important Labels and their positions on the cabinet

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-14
Number Label
1 Symbolic description:
•  manufacturing company
•  serial number of the
generator
•  manufacturing date

EDITOR can be replaced with: Variable Description


- PROVARIO GGG Variant of generator
- OptiX
650 Maximum output current
HFex01 can be replaced with:
mm/yyyy Date of manufacture
- HF x0
- x0HF xxxx Generator serial number

Expample EDITOR HFe 501 ccccccc-cccc Product number

PROVARIO HF 50 bbbb Maximum input current

OptiX 50HF zzzzzzzz Variant of housing


1a

or
Cabinet only for pretransformer, without all labels inside of the cabinet
xxxxx S/n: serial number of the corresponding generator
yyy maximal input current depends on generator variant

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-15
4

(Description: Do not drop fluid here)


5
Attention!
Danger de mort!
L'armoire peut seulement
être ouvert par du
personnel qualifié!

(yellow background) (against hazardous electrical voltage)


7
Fuses inside of the generator
All fuse types and ratings are listed in
chapter Error! Reference source not
found. of the technical manual 06220010
Fuses may be only replaced with fuses of
identical ratings.

(yellow background) (against moving parts)

Major options that add significant weight are:


1. 480VAC autotransformer 110 Kg
2. 208VAC Autotransformer 130 Kg
3. High Speed Starter 4 Kg

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-16
2.3 EDITOR HFe Generators Technical Data

EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR


Generator HFe 301 HFe 401 HFe 501 HFe 601 HFe 801

Output Power 32 kW 40 kW 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
mA / kW @ 0,1s
at 40 kV 400 / 16 400 / 16 400 / 16 400 / 16 400 / 16
at 60 kV 500 / 30 500 / 30 650 / 39 800 / 48 800 / 48
at 80 kV 400 / 32 500 / 40 500 / 40 800 / 64 800 / 64
at 100 kV 320 / 32 400 / 40 500 / 50 650 / 65 800 / 80
at 125 kV 250 / 31 320 / 40 400 / 50 520 / 65 500 / 62.5
at 150 kV 200 / 30 250 / 37.5 320 / 48 400 / 60 500 / 75
Continuous falling load (with yes yes yes yes yes
AEC)
kV range for exposure 40 – 150 kV 40 – 150 kV 40 – 150 kV 40 – 150 kV 40 – 150 kV
in increments of 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1kV
or in 27 steps 27 steps 27 steps 27 steps 27 steps
kV Accuracy ±(5%+1kV) ±(5%+1kV) ±(5%+1kV) ±(5%+1kV) ±(5%+1kV)
Pulsation 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz
mA range for exposure 10 – 500 mA 10 – 500 mA 10 – 650 mA 10 – 800 mA 10 – 800 mA
in 18 steps 18 steps 19 steps 20 steps 20 steps
mA Accuracy ±(6%+1mA) ±(6%+1mA) ±(6%+1mA) ±(6%+1mA) ±(6%+1mA)
max. mA @ max. kV ±(10%+1mA) for ±(10%+1mA) for ±(10%+1mA) for ±(10%+1mA) for ±(10%+1mA) for
s≤10ms s≤10ms s≤10ms ≤10ms <10ms
500mA @ 80kV 500mA @ 80kV 650mA @ 76kV 800mA @ 81kV 800mA @ 100kV
ms range for exposure 1 – 6300 ms 1 – 6300 ms 1 – 6300 ms 1 – 6300 ms 1 – 6300 ms
in 38 steps 38 steps 38 steps 38 steps 38 steps
ms Accuracy ±(4% +1ms) ±(4% +1ms) ±(4% +1ms) ±(4% +1ms) ±(4% +1ms)
±(10% +1ms) for ±(10% +1ms) for ±(10% +1ms) for ±(10% +1ms) for ±(10% +1ms) for
ms≤10ms ms≤10ms ms≤10ms ms≤10ms ms≤10ms
mAs range 0.5 – 600 mAs 0.5 – 600 mAs 0.5 – 600 mAs 0.5 – 600 mAs 0.5 – 600 mAs
in 32 steps 32 steps 32 steps 32 steps 32 steps
mAs range (optional) 0.5 – 1000mAs 0.5 – 1000mAs 0.5 – 1000mAs 0.5 – 1000mAs 0.5 – 1000mAs
in 34 steps 34 steps 34 steps 34 steps 34 steps
mAs Accuracy ±(10%+0,2mAs) ±(10%+0,2mAs) ±(10%+0.2mAs) ±(10%+0.2mAs) ±(10%+0.2mAs)

Fluoroscopy Option Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


kV range for fluoroscopy 40 - 125 kV 40 - 125 kV 40 - 125 kV 40 - 125 kV 40 - 125 kV
in increments of 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV
mA range for Fluoroscopy
High Current fluoroscopy 0.5 – 5.0 mA 0.5 – 5.0 mA 0.5 – 5.0 mA 0.5 – 5.0 mA 0.5 – 5.0 mA
Pulsed fluoroscopy * (1 – 20 mA) (1 – 20 mA) (1 – 20 mA) (1 – 20 mA) (1 – 20 mA)
(10 – 150 mA) (10 – 150 mA) (10 – 150 mA) (10 – 150 mA) (10 – 150 mA)
Max. mA @ Max. kV :
Continuous 8.2mA @ 125kV 8.2mA @ 125kV 8.2mA @ 125kV 8.2mA @ 125kV 8.2mA @ 125kV
Pulsed 150mA @ 125kV 150mA @ 125kV 150mA @ 125kV 150mA @ 125kV 150mA @ 125kV
Automatic Dose Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Max. image rate 50 50 50 50 50
(Pulse per sec.)
Automatic Exposure Control Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
(AEC)
AEC mAs Range 0.5-600 mAs 0.5-600 mAs 0.5-600 mAs 0.5-600 mAs 0.5-600 mAs

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-17
Dose/ Dose area product Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Printer- und PC-Interface RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
High Speed Starter HSS1/HSS2
3 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Standard AC Line voltage 400 V AC, 400 V AC, 400 V AC, 400 V AC, 400 V AC,
AC Line frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
AC Line Configuration 3N~ 3N~ 3N~ 3N~ 3N~
Other AC line input options: See below See below See below See below See below
(Paragraph 1.3.1) (Paragraph 1.3.1) (Paragraph 1.3.1) (Paragraph 1.3.1) (Paragraph 1.3.1)
Optional Generator Operating
control Console Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

without Operating Console


(OEM Version) Ethernet/RS-232 Ethernet/RS-232 Ethernet/RS-232 Ethernet/RS-232 Ethernet/RS-232
• Interface Board + Mini
Console
RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232
• Interface Box

Table 1-2: Technical data of EDITOR HFe


1
* Pulse mA current setting depends on pulse rate
2
* same parameters for AEC possible
3 HSS1/HSS2 Duty Cycle is 2 PREP or Exposures per minute on High Speed and 4 on Low Speed
*

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-18
2.3.1 Input current
Input current at maximum output power rating per phase lasting for 0,2 sec
Generator Output Mains Pre- Momentary Standby AC Line Momentary
type power voltage transformer max. input input Configuration power
current per current consumption
line per line
EDITOR 32kW 400V 72A 0,7A 3P+N+PE 40kVA
HFe 301 1
480V 61A 0,7A 3P+(N )+PE
EDITOR 40kW 400V 92A 0,7A 3P+N+PE 62kVA
HFe 401
420V x 89A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
440V x 86A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
480V x 79A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
1
480V 79A 0.7A 3P+(N )+PE
208V x 160A 2,6A 3P+N+PE
EDITOR 50kW 400V 113A 0,7A 3P+N+PE 76kVA
HFe 501
420V x 110A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
440V x 106A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
480V x 97A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
1
480V 97A 0,7A 3P+(N )+PE
208V x 206A 2,6A 3P+N+PE
EDITOR 65kW 400V 144A 0,7A 3P+N+PE 96kVA
HFe 601
420V x 140A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
440V x 136A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
480V x 124A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
1
480V 124A 0,7A 3P+(N )+PE
208V x 288A 2,6A 3P+N+PE
EDITOR 80kW 400V 180A 0,7A 3P+N+PE 120kVA
HFe 801
420V x 173A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
440V x 167A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
480V x 154A 0,7A 3P+N+PE
1
480V 154A 0.7A 3P+(N )+PE
1
(N ): With or without Neutral
Table 1-3: Input current

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-19
2.4 Specification for Radiography

2.4.1 Exposure techniques


The x-ray generator supports 3 types of exposure techniques.

Technique Used loading factors Description


1-point kV Manual selection of tube kV combined
with automatic selection of tube mA
and ms.
2-point kV, mAs Manual selection of tube kV and mAs
combined with automatic selection of
tube mA and ms
3-point kV, mA, ms Manual selection of tube kV, mA and
ms

2.4.2 Loading factors of the tube


The minimum mAs product of the generator is 0.5mAs. Combinations of mA and ms with a lower product
than 0.5mAs are not possible.
Loading factor exposure tube voltage in kV:
To be changed from 40kV to 150kV in steps of 1kV or optionally divided into maximum 27 steps. The
maximum exposure/fluoroscopy voltage can be limited in the generator settings. This loading factor is active
during all exposure techniques.

Stage 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
kV 40 41 42 44 46 48 50 52 55 57 60 63 66 70
Stage 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
kV 73 77 81 85 90 96 102 109 117 125 133 141 150
Loading factor time-current-product in mAs:
To be changed from 0.5mAs to 600mAs in 32 stages. The range of the time can be limited in the generator
settings. This loading factor is only active during the 2-point technique (kV and mAs).

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
mAs 0,5 0,63 0,8 1,0 1,3 1,6 2 2,5 3,2 4,0 5,0 6,3 8,0 10
Step 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
mAs 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Step 29 30 31 32
mAs 320 400 500 600
Loading factor tube current in mA:
To be changed from 10mA to 800mA in 20 stages. The range of the time can be limited in the generator
settings. This loading factor is only active during the 3-point technique (kV, mA, ms).

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
mA 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
Step 15 16 17 18 19 20
mA 250 320 400 500 650 800

Loading factor exposure time in ms:

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-20
To be changed from 1ms to 6300ms in 37 stages. The range of the time can be limited in the generator
settings. This loading factor is only active during the 3-point technique (kV, mA, ms).

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
ms 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 13 16 20 25
Step 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
ms 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 320 400 500 630 800
Step 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
ms 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300

2.5 Power Supply Requirements


The equipment will be functioning and meet the specifications if the proper mains supply requirements below
are met. All wiring must be in compliance with local regulations.

2.5.1 Line Voltage

EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR EDITOR


Generator Model HFe 301 HFe 401 HFe 501 HFe 601 HFe 801

Output Power Rating 32kW 40kW 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW


With Autotransformer (3PN) 208V Not available
Input Line Voltage Single Phase (1P) 208V-240V Not Available
Input Line voltage, 3 Phase (3PN) 400 V
Input Line Voltage 3 Phase (3P or 3PN) 400V /480 V
With Autotransformer (3PN) 420 V, 440 V, 480 V
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz ±1 Hz

Maximum Line Regulation 3 Phase 208V/ 400V /420V /440V/ 480V ±10%

Table 1-4: Input line voltage

2.5.2 Supply Cable

The supply cable diameter of the connection between the supply transformer and the disconnect
switch for power and protective earth has to be of sufficient to guarantee the apparent resistance.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-21
2.5.3 Environmental Conditions
Transport and storage conditions:

Temperature range -15°C to +50°C


Relative humidity range 15% to 95%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure range 500hPa to 1060hPa
Table 1-5: Transport – storage conditions
Operating conditions:

Temperature range +10°C to +40°C


Relative humidity range 15% to 75%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure range 700hPa to 1060hPa
Maximum Altitude 3000m
Table 1-6: Operating conditions

2.6 Required Tools and Measuring Instruments


You need the following tools, test equipment and miscellaneous equipment to install the x-ray system and to
perform the required acceptance test procedures. Make sure these items are available and in good repair
before starting these procedures.
• drilling machine
• standard screw driver set
• Philips screw driver set
• metric nut driver set
• Allan wrench set metric / imperial
• pliers
• Noninvasive kV, mA, time measuring equipment or Dynalyzer
• dose meter and probe for measurement with measuring range of 1 R/min to > 20 R/min
• a support or tripod to place the radiation probe and the attenuation materials
• attenuation blocks, AL 99.9%, 25 mm or 1 inch
• Loctite
• Insulating oil for high voltage connection
• calculator
• Radiation protection clothes (apron, gloves, etc.)
Table 1-7: Tools required for installation.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-22
WARNING
Even if the generator is shut off, parts on the inside of the generator cabinet
and connected controls are still powered! Ensure that only trained service
personnel open the generator cabinet and the housing of connected devices!
Improper handling may cause severe injury!
WARNING
Radiation protection: X-rays are dangerous to operator and others in the
vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are strictly observed.

WARNING
Please be sure that hot parts are cooled down before starting maintenance or
repair work.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 2-23
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 X-ray generator room preparation
The space designated for the installation of the X-ray Generator EDITOR HFe must be prepared. This must
include building changes for laying the electrical connections to a central distribution cabinet. The electrical
and structural design of the space designated for generator must comply with local code (electrical and
weight load) The transportation of the generator to its designated location should be done by using
carrying/lifting equipment.(Generator lifting must be done by two or more people)
The relevant regulations are to be observed at all times.

3.1.1 Power supply cable


The power supply cable is to be connected between the main power distribution box for the building to the
power distribution cabinet in the X-ray room.(or close proximity) The distribution cabinet in the X-ray room
shall provide 3 phase power to the X-ray generator and the examination units. The size of the power supply
cable wires shall meet the apparent resistance specify for each generator in the HFe Generator Technical
Data.
3 phases, L1, L2, L3, neutral conductor N and the earthed conductor PE are required.

3.1.2 Generator fusing (F1)


Building installation, mounted in the distribution box for the X-ray room.
The fuses are small compared to the operating current and operating power. This can be contrary to cross-
sectional diameter of the power cables, which are chosen for the required power supply resistance. It must
be considered that the X-ray generator only takes this high current for a short period of time. As opposed to
the Electrical Supply Company the calculations are carried out however, after the installed rating but where
the continuous rating is laid down.

fuse
mains supply slow blow
A
400V 50
420/440/480V 50
208/220V 100

Table 2-1: Generator fusing

3.1.3 Control fuse (F2)


Building installation, mounted in the distribution box for the X-ray room.
The auxiliary circuit for controlling the main contractor is to be protected by a 10 A fuse or circuit breaker.

3.1.4 Installation switch / Emergency OFF switch (S0)


See Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe
Building installation, connected to the distribution box for the X-ray room.
Note: The switch is to be mounted in the vicinity of the generator control console

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-2
3.1.5 Main contactor (K1)
Building installation, mounted in the distribution box for the X-ray room.
A 63 A contactor with an auxiliary contact and a 230 V AC coil is recommended for the EDITOR HFe.

3.1.6 Current-operated earth-leakage circuit-breaker (F3)


See Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe
Building installation, mounted in the distribution box for the X-ray room.
An AC / DC ELCB (Earth-Leakage Circuit Breaker) with a leakage current of 30 mA is recommended for the
EDITOR HFe.

Main supply ELCB


400V 63A
420/440/480V 63A
208/220V 100A

Table 2-2: Earth leakage circuit breaker

3.1.7 Main neutral point bar (N)


See Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe Building installation, mounted
in the distribution box for the X-ray room.

3.1.8 Main safety earth bar (PE)


See Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe Building installation, mounted
in the distribution box for the X-ray room.

3.1.9 Transfer terminal block (X1)


The power cable from the distribution box to the X-ray generator should not exceed 32 mm² because of the
input terminals inside the rear panel of the generator. It does not have to be a flexible cable because the rear
panel of the generator is screwed to the building wall.
The rear panel that is screwed to the wall is 160 mm shorter than the accompanying standard cabinet so that
there is 40 mm between the wall and the cabinet, allowing a cable trucking with a cross-section of 130 x 40
mm to be laid along the skirting board or at the cabinet height that can carry the cables.
In this way, all incoming cables are to be fixed to the rear panel. Control cables are to be fixed using
intermediate terminals or adapters that are fixed to rails on the rear panel.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-3
Figure 2-1: Power supply connection of the x-ray generator EDITOR HFe
Three Phase Connection

L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F1

F2

K1

0,03A

N PE
F3

S0 L1 L2 L3 N PE X1

Generator

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-4
Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX
EDITOR HFe page 3-5
3.2 System overview

3.2.1 HFe Generators Modules and electronic boards

Figure 2-2 Editor HFe Cabinet Above

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-6
Position of the modules and boards
1- HZG1 - Filament heating board (inactive focus)
(only with fluoroscopy option)
2- HZG1 - Filament heating board (active focus)
3- NAG2 - Device interface / low speed starter
4- BA6/7 - Automatic exposure control board
5- ZST2 - Central controller board
6- IFF1 - Fluoroscopy interface
(only with fluoroscopy option)
7- UNI1 - Universal fluoroscopy connector adapter
(only with fluoroscopy option)
8- HSS1 - High speed starter (optional)
9- BUS2 - Back plane board for radiography
BUS4 - Back plane board for fluoroscopy option
10- ANS2 - IGBT driver board ( inside converter)
11- WR - Converter and power supply
12- KB5 - Connector board high voltage transformer
13- HS-1AP - high voltage transformer for one tube
14- BE26* - Control board inside of the control panel (not shown in figure 2-2)
BE28* - Control board inside of the interface box for remote control (not shown in figure 2-2)

15 – SICII - Control Interface Board (optional)

16 - HSS2 - High Speed Starter (optional)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-7
3.2.2 Connecting cables
This chapter gives an overview of the cables inside the cabinets and the connections to external devices.
Designations for the plugs are as follows: First listed is the name of the circuit board (or module) followed by
a slash and the name of the connector.

For example cable C2: 06000316 cable form board UNI1 / X13 to board BA6 / X1

06000316 06000316
UNI1/X13 – BA6/X1 UNI1/X13 – BA6/X1
UNI1/X13 BA6/X1

3.2.2.1 Connecting cables Radiography generator

Figure 2-3: Cable overview radiography generator

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-8
No. Ident-no. designation function
C1 0600 0348 BUS/X4 - Desk Data cable to control panel
C1-1 0600 0310 BUS/X28 Interface box Data cable to interface box
C1-1 0600 0310 BUS/X28 TFT control panel Data cable to TFT control panel
C3 0600 0241 ZST2/X10 - NAG2/X7 Interface cable ZST2 to NAG2
C8 0600 0206 BUS/X - HV-TR/X1 Filament heating to high voltage
transformer
C9 0600 0229 BUS/X11 - NV/X2 230Vac standby, for power on
C10 0600 0234 NAG2/X10(1-2) - NV/X8 External door contact
C11 0600 0231 NAG2/X8(1-2) - NV/X6 Thermo contact to tube
C12 0600 0208 BUS/X15 - NV/X6 Internal Stator cable to sub-distribution
(NV)
C13 0600 0230 BUS/X12 - NV/K1 230Vac power on
C14 0600 0232 ZST2/X5 - ANS2/X5 Interface cable to converter
C15 0600 0207 BUS/X9 - HV-TR/X2 Measuring cable kV mA
C16 0600 0330 BUS/X3 - DAP Optional cable to DAP chamber
C20 0600 0345 WR/X6 - Tube Cable to tube stator
C22 0700-0101 PD/X2 L1 - NV-L1 Optional cable mains L1 from pre-
transformer
C23 0700-0102 PD/X2 L2 - NV-L2 Optional cable mains L2 from pre-
transformer
C24 0700-0103 PD/X2 L3 - NV-L3 Optional cable mains L3 from pre-
transformer
C25 0700-0104 PD/X2 N - NV-N Optional cable mains N from pre-
transformer
C26 0700-0105 PD/PE-bar - NV-PE-bar Optional cable mains PE from pre-
transformer
C27 0600 0357 WR/X3 - WR/X10 230V Power supply ANS2 inside
converter
C28 0600 0228 WR/V1/V2/C2,E1 - TR/B,C Converter output to high voltage
transformer primary side
C29 HV-trafo (+) - Tube anode High voltage cable to tube Anode
6100 1095
C30 HV-trafo (-) - Tube cathode High voltage cable to tube Cathode
C31 NAG2/X11 - Flat panel Optional interface cable to flat panel.
Depends on used DR system
C32 BA6/X1-X4 - Measuring cham. Measuring cable to external measuring
chambers
C33 NAG2/X3 - Bucky device Optional interface cable to bucky device.
Depends on used Bucky type
C34 NV/X7 - Warning light Optional cable to external warning light
C35 NV/X8 - Door contact Optional cable to external door contact

Table 2-3: List of cables of the radiography generator

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-9
3.2.2.2 Connecting cables Fluoroscopy generator

C28

Figure 2-4: Cable overview fluoroscopy generator


The cables are numbered from C1 to C30. Detailed information to each cable is listed in the

Table 2-4: List of cables on the next page.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-10
No. Ident-no. designation function
C1 0600 0348 BUS/X4 - control panel Data cable to control panel
C1-1 BUS/X28 Interface box Data cable to interface box
C2 0600 0316 UNI1/X13 - BA6/X1 AEC (only with FLXIS systems)
C3 0600 0241 ZST2/X10 - NAG2/X7 Interface cable ZST2 to NAG2
C4 0510 0299 ZST2/X17 - IFF1/X16 Data cable CAN-BUS (optional)
C5 0600 0343 FS1 - FS Cable to foot switch
C6 0600 0319 UNI1 - FS1/FS2 Y-cable to foot switch 1 and 2 (optional)
C6-2 Not used
C6-3 0600 0341 FS2 - X-ARC Connection cable to external Foot switch
X-ARC
C7 0600 0318 UNI1/X23 - FLXIS/J10 Data cable to Flxis II (optional)
C8 0600 0206 BUS/X - HV-TR/X1 Filament heating to high voltage
transformer
C9 0600 0229 BUS/X11 - NV/X2 230Vac standby, for power on
C10 0600 0234 NAG2/X10(1-2) - NV/X8 230Vac external warning light
C11 0600 0231 NAG2/X8(1-2) - NV/X6 Thermo contact to tube
C12 0600 0208 BUS/X15 - NV/X6 Internal Stator cable to sub-distribution
(NV)
C13 0600 0230 BUS/X12 - NV/K1 230Vac power on
C14 0600 0232 ZST2/X5 - ANS2/X5 Interface cable to converter
C15 0600 0207 BUS/X9 - HV-TR/X2 Measuring cable kV mA
C16 BUS/X3 - DAP Optional cable to DAP chamber
C17 Not used
C18 0600 0324 UNI1/X14 - RALCO Cable to RALCO collimator
C19 Not used
C20 0600 0345 WR/X6 - Tube Cable to tube stator
C21 0600 0346 WR/X6 Tube-Thermo Cable to tube thermo contact
Normally C20 C21 together in one.
C22 0700-0101 PD/X2 L1 - NV-L1 Optional cable mains L1 from pre-
transformer
C23 0700-0102 PD/X2 L2 - NV-L2 Optional cable mains L2 from pre-
transformer
C24 0700-0103 PD/X2 L3 - NV-L3 Optional cable mains L3 from pre-
transformer
C25 0700-0104 PD/X2 N - NV-N Optional cable mains N from pre-
transformer
C26 0700-0105 PD/PE-bar - NV-PE-bar Optional cable mains PE from pre-
transformer
C27 0600 0357 WR/X3 - WR/X10 230V Power supply ANS2 inside
converter
C28 0600 0228 WR/V1/V2/C2,E1 - TR/B,C Converter output to high voltage
transformer primary side
C29 HV-trafo (+) - Tube anode High voltage cable to tube Anode
6100 1095
C30 HV-trafo (-) - Tube cathode High voltage cable to tube Cathode

Table 2-4: List of cables of the fluoroscopy generator

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-11
3.2.3 List of HFe Generator Medical Devices/Assemblies Compatibility
The list below includes the devices that the HFe Generator is compatible with them. Other similar Medical
devices may be compatible with HFe Generator. Please contact manufacture for more details.
Note: HSS2 option doesn’t need phase shift capacitor

Tube Housing Small Large Main Shift Low Low High Speed HV RAD/FL
(Stator) Speed Speed max.
Focus Focus [Ohm] [Ohm] 150/180Hz [KV]
50Hz 60Hz
size size (HSS) [µF]
[µF] [µF]
VARIAN
RAD8 Diamond 1,0 2,0 20 50 43 30 no 125 RAD
RAD14 Diamond 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL
RAD14 B100 0,6 1,2 16 50 43 30 no* 150 RAD/FL
RAD21 Sapphire 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL
RAD60 Sapphire 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL
A132 B100 0,6 1,2 16 50 43 30 no 150 RAD/FL
A142 B100 0,3 1,0 16 50 43 30 no* 150 RAD/FL
A192 B130 0,6 1,2 16 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL
A292 B130 0,6 1,2 16 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL
G292 B130 0,6 1,2 16 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD/FL

SIEMENS
RAY 12S-1 SV 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 no 150 RAD
RAY 14S-1 SV 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 7,5 150 RAD

DUNLEE
PX1429 DU304 0,6 1,2 20 50 40/43 30 no 150 RAD
DU1505 DA180 0,6 1,2 14 46 30 30 no 150 RAD
DU1750 DA90 0,6 1,2 36 43 30 30 no 150 RAD
DR1817 DA90 0,6 1,2 36 44 30 30 no 150 RAD
DR1833 DA90 0,6 1,2 36 43 30 30 no 150 RAD

PHILIPS
DA1750 ROT350 0,6 1,2 36 43 30 ? no 150 RAD

TOSHIBA
E7252X XH-106V 0,6 1,2 9,4 28,3 44 44 6 150 RAD
(XS-AL)
E7252X XH-106V 0,6 1,2 27,5 58,0 30 30 Y 150 RAD
(XS-R)
E7254X XH-157 0,6 1,2 20,2 38,0 30 30 6 150 RAD/FL
E7269 0,6 1,2 9.4 28.3 44 44 6 150 RAD/FL
E7239 1.0 2.0 24 24 No 125 RAD

KAILONG
RADII H1 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 no 150 RAD
H1080X

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-12
Tube Housing Small Large Main Shift Low Low High Speed HV RAD/FL
(Stator) Speed Speed max.
Focus Focus [Ohm] [Ohm] 150/180Hz [KV]
50Hz 60Hz
size size (HSS) [µF]
[µF] [µF]
RADII H1 0,6 1,2 20 50 43 30 no 150 RAD
H1086

COMET
DI93H DX93H 0,6 1,5 20 50 30 no no 150 RAD
DX96H DX96 0,6 1,3 20 50 30 no no 150 RAD

IAE
X50H C52 1,0 2,0 20 40 25-40 25-40 no 150 RAD
X50AH C52 1,2 2,0 20 40 25-40 25-40 no 150 RAD
RTM90H C52 0,6 1,3 20 40 25-40 25-40 no 150 RAD
RTM90H C52 0,6 1,5 20 40 25-40 25-40 no 150 RAD
RTM101HS C100 0,6 1,5 20 40 25-40 25-40 no 150 RAD

Table 2-5: Compatible tubes


Hints:
- Both Stator types must be same!
- CGR – Option (only low speed, not all generator types can support CGR option!)

AEC Chambers (3 cells):

AEC BA6, ANALOG DEVICE


Chamber Chamber Type Fields KS Amplifier BA6 Type Adapter

COMET B3 Solid State 3 VV21 A YES


PHILIPS 9803 509 10002 Ion Chamber 3 VV20 A YES, Modification required!
PHILIPS PEI 9890 000 01613 Ion Chamber 3 no B Need old Philips connector!
PHILIPS PEI 9890 000 01612 Ion Chamber 3 no B Need old Philips connector!
VACUTEC BAK70147-147 00 01 Ion Chamber 3 VV20 A no
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 15 Ion Chamber 3 VV20 A no
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 42 Ion Chamber 3 no B no
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 43 Ion Chamber 3 no B no
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 4 Ion Chamber 3 no C Special Adapter required!
VACUTEC BAK70151-151 00 01 Ion Chamber 3 no C Special Adapter required!
VACUTEC BAK70151-151 00 16 Ion Chamber 3 no C Special Adapter required!
SIEMENS Ion Chamber 3 VV20 A YES
SIEMENS Ion Chamber 3 no D no

Others Solid State / Ion 3 VV21 / VV20 A Special!

AEC BA7, DIGITAL DEVICE


Chamber Chamber Type Fields KS Amplifier BA7 Type Adapter

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-13
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 45 Ion Chamber 3 no DIGITAL RJ45
VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 44 Ion Chamber 3 no DIGITAL SUB-D 9 – RJ45

AEC BA7 type B, DIGITAL DEVICE


Chamber Chamber Type Fields KS Amplifier BA7 Type Adapter

VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 45 Ion Chamber 3 no DIGITAL RJ45


VACUTEC BAK70145-145 00 44 Ion Chamber 3 no DIGITAL SUB-D 9 – RJ45
VACUTEC BAK70139-139 00 03 Ion Chamber 5 no DIGITAL Sub-D15

DR Detectors:

SAMSUNG Xmaru1717 - DR Software - O&R, Protec


DRTECH - DR Software - O&R (DRTECH interface)
TOSHIBA - DR Software - O&R, Protec
ATS HIRIS RF43 - DR software ATS
(Other detectors are possible to interface to HFe Generator, universal interface!)

DAP
Vacutec DAP

Collimators:
1. Any manual collimator using 24VAC( with 24V option)
2. Automatic collimator xxxx

Image intensifier/
1. FLXIS System

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-14
3.3 Mechanical installation
3.3.1 Before installation:
After un-packaging and there is high humidity or the risk of condensed water please wait until system has
room temperature.

3.3.2 Fixing the power cabinet


The cabinet of the generator and is intended for wall fixing. The removable back panel of the generator
cabinets has 6 holes to fix it to the wall of the installation room. The positions of the mounting holes are
shown in Figure 2-5: Position of the mounting holes
The generator cabinet has 4 screwable clamps to fix the generator cabinet to the mounted back panel. The 4
clamps are accessible from the front side of the generator.
• Remove the screws at the bottom of the front panel.
• Remove the front panel from the generator cabinet
• Loose the 4 screwable clamps to loosen the rear panel.
• Remove the rear panel from the generator cabinet.
• Remove the two chromed transport bolts from the rear panel (upper side).
• Drill the holes to the wall.
• Mount the rear panel to the wall of the installation room.
• The generator cabinet can be fixed to the rear panel after all cables are installed.

Figure 2-5: Position of the mounting holes

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-15
3.4 Electrical installation

WARNING
Make sure that the mains voltage is switched off before connecting the mains power cord.

In this chapter, only the short names of the cables are used, as described in the cable overview in Error!
Reference source not found..

3.4.1 Connection Points Overview

3.4.1.1 Sub distribution


The sub distribution is placed on the backside of the generator behind the converter cabinet.

Optional light
field transformer

PE N, L1, L2, L3 230V Stator + X-ray Door- Not


BAR Mains input Multi-socket Thermo- Light conta used
contact 230V ct

X1 X4/X5 X6 X7 X8 X9

Figure 2-6 Connections to the sub distribution

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-16
3.4.2 Mains connection

3.4.2.1 Connection to 400VAC Mains voltage

• Before installation make sure that the mains voltage in the room distribution box meets
the specifications.
3 phases, L1, L2, L3, neutral N and the protective earth PE are required.

Line voltage 400 V AC,


Line frequency 50/60Hz
Line connector 3PH+N+PE

• If the mains voltage does not meet the specification an additional three phase pre-
autotransformer in an optional cabinet is required.

Connect the main power cable to the Connect the mains cable to the terminal on the
sub distribution terminal X1 and the sub-distribution
protective earth cable to the
grounding bar.
L1 X1-1
L2 X1-2
L3 X1-3
N X1-N
PE PE-bar

• The power cord should be fixed with cable straps to the generator cabinet.

3.4.2.2 Connections to mains voltage 400/480V Y or Delta Distribution Line option


• Measure the AC line mains voltage between phases and to neutral.(if neutral available) Make sure
AC line distribution box meets the generator’s AC line specifications: 3 phases, L1, L2, L3, with or
without neutral N and the protective earth PE are required.
• Based on AC Line the generator must be configured to either 400V AC or 480V AC,
Same AC line connection shall be done on both Transformers.
• Set jumpers for AC line 400V or 480V based on measurements. Jumpers must be set on items T1,
T2 (optional), and AC Line Board before connecting power to generator. (See setting images below)
• Before connections of mains to generator turn OFF mains voltage in the room, and make sure
with multi-meter that the voltage is zero

Line voltage 400V or 480V V AC / Y, Delta


Line frequency 50/60Hz
Line connector 3PH+PE with or without N

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-17
Chassis
PE
Connection 400Vac Connection
Jumper E11 to E13

E11

480Vac Connection
Jumper E11 to E12

Set jumpers for either 400VAC or 480V AC on AC Line PCB

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-18
T1 T2

Primary
Connections

Neutral
Connection

230Vac 24Vac
Primary 60Vac Secondary
Secondary
Move wire select 230Vac
here for 400Vac Secondary

Select 480Vac F2
F1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-19
Input Line configuration:

Before connections of mains are attached to generator, turn OFF mains voltage in the room,
and make sure with multi-meter that the voltage is z

3.4.2.3 Connections to mains voltage 420VAC-480VAC option (Autotransformer)


• Measure the AC line mains voltage between phases and to neutral. Make sure distribution box
meets the generator’s specifications: 3 phases, L1, L2, L3, neutral N and the protective earth PE are
required
• The Auto transformer option is available as an integrated version within a cabinet height of at least
97 cm or built in a separate cabinet with a height of at least 70cm.

Figure 2-7 Integrated version of a pre-transformer in a 97cm cabinet.

L1
N PE
L2
L3

Figure 2-8 Integrated version of a pre-transformer in a 97cm cabinet.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-20
Figure 2-9 Pre-transformer built in separate 70cm cabinet (optional).

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-21
• Before connections of mains to generator turn OFF mains voltage in the room, and make sure
with multi-meter that the voltage is zero
• If an external cabinet pre-transformer is used:
1. The incoming voltage wire shall possess the correct resistance specified for the
corresponding input voltage. (420V/440V/480V)
2. The outgoing voltage wire shall possess the correct resistance specified for 400V.

Line voltage 420, 440, 480 V AC,


Line frequency 50/60Hz
Line connector 3PH+N+PE

• The power cord should be fixed with cable straps to the generator cabinet.
• Connect the other side of the 3 phase wires of the mains fuse to the Auto transformer taps that
match closest the voltage measured.( i.e if mains voltage is 487VAC the 3 wires should be
connected to 3 480VAC taps in the Autotransformer)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-22
- Check the mains voltage of the room
installation and compare it with the
information on the transformer.
- Connect the three loose wires coming
from the fuse with the appropriate
primary terminals of the transformer.

- Connect the mains supply cable to the


connection terminals X1.
- Connect the generator cabinet to the
connection terminal X2.

3.4.2.4 Connections to mains voltage 208V Y option (Autotransformer)


• Measure the AC line mains voltage between phases and to neutral. Make sure distribution box
meets the generator’s specifications: 3 phases, L1, L2, L3, neutral N and the protective earth PE are
required
• The Auto transformer option is available as an integrated version within a cabinet height of at least
97 cm or built in a separate cabinet with a height of at least 70cm.
• Before connections of mains to generator turn OFF mains voltage in the room, and make sure
with multi-meter that the voltage is zero
• If an external cabinet pre-transformer is used:
1. The incoming voltage wire shall possess the correct resistance specified for 208V.
2. The outgoing voltage wire shall possess the correct resistance specified for 400V.

Line voltage 208 V AC / Y,


Line frequency 50/60Hz
Line connector 3PH+N+PE

• The power cord should be fixed with cable straps to the generator cabinet.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-23
Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX
EDITOR HFe page 3-24
pre-transformer connection 208V
- Check the mains voltage of the room
installation and compare it with the
information on the transformer.
- Connect the mains supply cable to the
connection terminals X1.
- Connect the generator cabinet to the
connection terminal X2.

mains Gen

3.4.3 Installation of the high voltage transformer


• The high voltage transformer is connected to the generator and mounted to the generator
cabinet. It must be unscrewed to install the HV cables and to remove the optional
pressure control valve.
• Insert the transformer into the cabinet.
• Connect the protective earth cable.
• Connect the cable 06000206, 06000207 to the plugs X1, X2.
• Connect the cable 06000228 to the two primary bolts

Loosen the four screws of the high voltage


transformer.
The transformer can now be slid backwards to
connect the high voltage cables from the back
side of the generator.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-25
3.4.4 Removing the optional pressure control valve

Valve mounted on the high voltage


transformer with separate ventilation screw.
The valve is installed in a way to equalize
higher pressure inside the tank.
2
Direction of the
I
valve
O
Y
1
Nipple after removing the valve

Removed nipple

Ventilation screw with ventilation hole

Inserted ventilation screw which is 6mm


opened

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-26
3.4.5 High Voltage Cables
To connect the high voltage cables to the high voltage transformer and the tube

Please pay attention to the High voltage cable manufacturer's instructions. Different kinds of
isolation material are used by manufactures (Silicon oil, silicon grease)

• Use of silicon grease.


Thoroughly clean tube receptacles and high tension cable ends. Cover the plugs with
silicon paste. The cable terminal insulator and its receptacle in the tube housing or
transformer must be clean, dry and free of oil or other previously used material. Be sure
that the rubber compression gasket is in place. Coat the entire surface of the cable
terminal insulator using a clean, dry plastic spoon or wooden stick. Do not use fingers.
Apply small cone of silicon grease paste at the end of insulator between the pins. Slowly
insert the cable terminal plug into its socket until all the excess compound has oozed out.
Make sure the contact pins are engaged in the holes in the socket insulator and wipe off
the excess compound. Tighten the cable ring while holding the cable firmly in place.
Tighten the safety screw on the connector ring in order to prevent it opened without using
tool.(LN Screw) Pay attention to the manufacturers labeling of the silicon paste.

3.4.6 Connecting the stator cable and thermo contact cable


• Connect the stator cable to the stator terminals of the tube. The single wires are
numbered. Also connect the cable shielding (green/yellow) together with the Tube PE-
cable to the PE bolt on the tube.
• Measure the impedance of the tube stator coil on the side of connector X6 to control the
electrical cable connection to the tube. Read the datasheet of the tube housing to get the
values for the stator impedance.
The values in the following table are only for example.
Pin number Function Resistance (example values)
3(V) – 1(U) Common – shift phase ~ 50Ω
3(V) – 2(W) Common – main phase ~ 20Ω
2(W) – 1(U) Shift phase – main phase ~ 70Ω
5-6 Thermal Switch/Pressure < 2Ω (closed contact inside tube)
Sensor

WARNING:
HFe Generator can’t be operated without X-Ray tube Thermal Switch or Pressure Sensor
connected to X6-5 and X6-6.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-27
• Connect the separate 6mm² protective earth cables coming from the tube to the PE-bar of the sub-
distribution.

PE

Figure 2-10 : Connection of Tube PE


• Choose the correct value of the phase shift capacitor on the back side of the electronic
cabinet. See table compatible tubes and the datasheet of the tube to get the needed
value of the phase shift capacitor. The generator is equipped with a 30µF phase shift
capacitor. This can be upgrade with an additional 15µF parallel capacitor. The additional
capacitor can be ordered by Spellman high voltage GmbH Bochum.

Picture Description
Position of the 30µF phase shift capacitor
on the backside of the electronic cabinet

Placed additional 15µF shift capacitor.

Connection cables between both


capacitors

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-28
Picture Description
Connected capacitors with a capacity of
45µF.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-29
3.4.7 Principal function diagram of the tube stator connection

Figure 2-11: Connection diagram of the Tube stator

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-30
3.4.8 Connecting the control panel
The connectors are on the backside of the panel.

PE

Generator Not used handswitch Remote PC or


printer

Figure 2-12: Connector control panel


• Connect the data cable C1 to the control panel. The connector is marked with
"Generator".
• The other end of the data cable is connected to X4 on the BUS board inside the
generator.
• Connect the separate PE-cable to the PE-bolt on the control panel rear panel, and the
other side to the PE-bar of the generator's sub-distribution.
• An external PC for remote control or an optional label printer can be connected to the
right connector.

3.4.9 Connecting the optional Touch panel


The Touch panel can be connected to the generator instead of the control panel.

Figure 2-13 Touch panel


• Connect the data cable C1-1 to the interface box. The data cable is different to the
standard control panel cable.
• Connect the data cable to X28 on the BUS2 board inside the generator.
• The external hand switch for exposure is fix connected to the internal hardware.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-31
3.4.10 Connecting the optional interface box
The digital interface box will be connected to the generator instead of the control panel. The interface box
works as a serial interface to an external remote control PC. It contains buttons for switching on and off, a
display to show the exposure parameters, an X-ray warning light and a connection to an external exposure
hand switch.

Figure 2-14: Connector digital interface box


• Connect the data cable C1-1 to the interface box. The data cable is different to the
standard control panel cable.
• The other end of the data cable is connected to X28 on the BUS board inside the
generator.
• Connect the separate PE-cable to the PE-bolt on interface box, and the other side to the
PE-bar of the generator's sub-distribution.
• Connect the external PC for remote control to the connector marked with “PC”
• Connect separate hand switch for exposure to the connector marked with “hand switch”

3.4.11 Connecting the Dose Area Product meter DAP (optional)


• The function for the dose area meter must be enabled in the generator setup.
• Connect the cable to the connector X3 (DAP1) and X20 (DAP2) on the BUS board.

Sub-D connector X3/X20 Function


2 Signal A (+), RS-485
3 GND
8 Signal B (-), RS-485
9 +16V power supply
6 GND

• Jumper settings on the ZST2 board

Jumper Position
X52 1-2
X59 2-3
X61 open
X62 open

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-32
Figure 2-15: ZST2 print screen (DAP meter)

3.4.12 Connecting the VacuDAPduo (optional)


• The function for the VacuDAPduo must be enabled in the generator setup (see 3.2.2.1).
• Connect the cable to the connector X3 on the BUS board.

Sub-D connector to X3 Function


2 Signal A (+), RS-485
3 GND
8 Signal B (-), RS-485
9 +16V power supply
6 GND

• Jumper settings on the ZST2 board

Jumper Position
X52 2-3
X59 1-2
X61 close
X62 close

Figure 2-16: ZST2 print screen (VacuDAPduo)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-33
3.4.13 HSS2 Overview of the hardware

Overview of the high speed starter module

ASSY 460087-002 REV B[ ]

+
1
3

REV. B[ ]

-
S/S, REV. B

JB4

JB5
POWER
POLE

BUS Voltage: Power Pole Connectors


Pin Wire / Connector Color Function
1 RED +BUS Voltage
2 BLACK Return

JB4: 6 Position, 0.156” Center


Pin Function Description
1 +24V +24Vdc Input Power
2 GND Return for Input Power
3 B1 Not Used
4 RESET Clears Faults
5 B0 Enables HSS
6 /FAULT Open Collector: Goes Low With Fault

JB5: 9 Position “D” Connector


Pin Function Description
1 HSS2 SPEED Not used. For future implementation
SELECT
2/3/5/6/7/8 Not Used
4 CANH CAN bus Interface
9 CANL CAN bus Interface

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-34
Rear View

TB1 PINS:
1 2 3 4

PHASE (U)
COMM (V)

MAIN (W)
GND

TB1: External connection to the X-Ray Tube Anode Motor. Use ring lugs TE Connectivity, PN 320634 or
equivalent.

\\\\\\\\\\

TB1: 2 Phase Motor Connection


Pin Name Function
1 COMMON (V) Common connection
2 PHASE (U) Aux. winding of stator
3 MAIN (W) Main winding of stator
4 GND Common connection

TB1: 3 Phase Motor Connection


Pin Name Function
1 W-PHASE W Phase Winding
2 V-PHASE V Phase Winding
3 U-PHASE U Phase Winding

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-35
4 GND Tube Ground

Light emitting diodes LED


LED Number Color Function
DS1-Top Red General Fault Indicator. See Error Handling For fault
descriptions
DS1-Middle Green Power On Indicator
DS1-Bottm Yellow Flashes when the HSS2 is on.
Repetition Rates:
Boost Mode = 10Hz
Run Mode = 2.5Hz
Brake Mode = 0.6Hz

Switches
Switch Function
Number
W1 the microprocessor

Jumpers
Jumper Default Function
JP1 Closed For Factory Programming
JP2 Open I/O Setup. Not Used.
JP3 Closed CAN Bus Termination

Test points
TP Signal Function
TP1 +3.3V Bias Supply
TP2 +15V Bias Supply Control signal of the
Inverter IGBT V2 and V3
TP3 GND Ground
TP4 +5V Bias Supply
TP5 GND Ground

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 3-36
4 Generator setup

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-37
4.1 Power on test
If the electrical installation is finished, the system can be switched on for the first time.
The power on test should be done while disconnecting IGBT drive from the ZST2 board to the converter.
This prevents the unwanted release of radiation.
Disconnect the cable 06000232 off connector X5 on the ZST2 board.

Warning:
The connector X5 must not be reconnected to the ZST2 if the system is
switched on.

Check the following:

- Switch on the mains power supply to the generator.


- Verify the power on LED on the control panel lights red and the standby LED V34 lights green.
- Switch on the generator. The generator starts a self-test. The firmware versions number is
shown during self-test on the control panel display.
- After the self-test the start exposure and fluoroscopy default parameters are shown on the
display
- The filament heating starts. (The LED inside the focus button flash for 5s during focus heat up).
After that the LED is switched on permanently.
- At the same time the generator tries to link a serial connection to the FLXIS system. The LED
in the device button 3 is flashing during this link connection (maximum time duration: 60s).
- The generator is ready after the blinking LEDs on the control panel are permanently on and no
error message appears on the display.

4.2 Setup
If the electrical installation of all cables and external components is done the generator is ready for
customization.
The setup is divided into different functional blocks

- „System“
- „Generator“
- „Device“ (with sub dialogs for the „XRAY device settings“)
- „Tube settings“
- „Filament settings“
- „kV control settings“
- “Collimator settings”
- “Image system settings”
- „Statistics“
The generator configuration can be done with a service PC using the service software or directly on the
control desk. The configuration via the service software utility is recommended because the generator
configuration via control panel is limited. Some configuration parameters are not available with the control
panel. For more detailed information about the configuration software see document 06220011 which is
provided with generator's documentation.
Before starting the system configuration a short power on test should be done to check that all cables are
connected properly.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-38
4.2.1 Introduction to the configuration software of the generator
The service software is a windows application to get access to the generator service settings. It can be used
for generator configuration, for tube calibration and for troubleshooting. This tool needs no installation on the
service PC. All required files of this program are contained on the delivered CD. This file needs to be copied
to the hard disc of the service PC. The environmental parameters need to be set in the initialization file
“setup.ini”.

4.2.1.1 Required Equipment


- A PC with one of the operating systems below:
- Windows 98(SE)
- Windows ME
- Windows NT
- Windows 2000
- Windows XP.
- Windows 7 32-Bit (64-Bit)
- At least one RS232 interface on the PC (COM1-4). More recent notebooks frequently do not
have any serial interfaces so that a USB-RS232 adapter might be used.

- An extension cable (1:1, not a NULL modem). Maximum length 15m.

- An adapter cable (06220244) from a 9-pole SUB-D (female) to a 2 x 5-pole plug socket. This
adapter cable is connected to the ZST2 board at delivery.

4.2.1.2 Preparing of the service PC


- Connect the service PC to the generator. The generator should be turned off.
The flat cable can be connected to the front connector on the ZST2 board or directly to the
microprocessor board MP16 on the ZST2 board.

- Connect the other side of the service cable 06000244 to the serial COM port of the service PC. An
extension cable can be used for larger distances to the service PC.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-39
- Copy the folder Service.416rxx from the delivered service CD to the service PC.
The following files are included:

Service files description


Service software followed by the version number
Automatic generated copy of the used error messages
Automatic generated copy of the used error messages
Default generator configuration file
Copy of the used error messages
Service settings of the generator as delivered
Copy of the anatomic program file
Initialization file of the service software
Copy of the tube table

- Open the setup.ini file with a text editor.

- Change the settings to the used serial COM port number.

The service software works only with the first 4 COM port numbers. The number of the available
serial COM ports is shown in the hardware manager of the windows operating system. Larger COM
port numbers are reserved for special applications.

- Save the changed “setup.ini"

- If an error message appears during program start check the file setup.ini or use another COM port.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-40
- Turn on the generator. Start the setup software on the service PC
If no problem appears the firmware of the generator and the start parameters are shown in the left
window of the service program.

Firmware version

Start parameter

- If an error message appears try to use another COM port number. The other parameters in the
setup.ini should not be changed.

4.2.2 Backup the generator settings


- It is recommended to make a backup of the current generator settings before changing settings. Use
the transfer command for the large data transfer “Read all gen. settings”. This file contains all data
stored on the ZST2 board (32kB).

Choose menuTransferread all gen. settings.

The download takes normally less than 1min. The transmitted data will be checked at the end of the
transfer.

- Save the downloaded generator configuration. Use a unique file name.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-41
Recommended file name structure: HFe3xxxx_YYYY-MM-DD-zz.svc. (zz = index)
(For example HFe31234_2011-01-15-01.svc).
- Also save the generator configuration a second time using the default name ED-HF2.SVC.

- The generator configurations are now saved on the service PC.


Now the generator setup with the tube calibration can be started.
For more information on using the service program use the document 06000011.

4.2.2.1 Generator settings


- Connect service PC to the generator
- Download the generator setup data from the generator and make a backup, if not done before.
Start the sub menu for the organ program settings.

Menu  Settings  Generator...

Generator settings Action

- Set the Focus chamber distance to the correct value


in mm. This value is used together with the FFD
value to calculate the dose if a VacuDAPduo
chamber is used (optional).
- To activate the VacuDAPduo either "DAP/Dose
2 2
(1mGycm )" or "DAP/Dose (0.1mGycm )" has to be
enabled.

4.2.3 Setup of the internal time

1. The memory of the internal clock will be deleted if the clock


buffer battery (Type CR2032) is empty or removed. In this case
the generator set the Error E043. The memory and the internal
time must be reset after the battery is replaced.

- Open the statistic in the service software


- Press button “Load” to see the value of the exposure
counter.
- Press the button “Read time from gen”. The internal
clock is set automatically to 01.01.2000 but start first
when the time is written to the generator.
- Press button “Reset service warning”
- Use your Key code and press OK. Default key code is
2. 0 if now key code is set.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-42
3.
- The exposure counter of each tube shows random
values when first time turn on or after battery
replacement, and must be reset. The old values of the
tube counter are lost during battery replacement.

- Press button “Reset exposers tube 1” to reset the


exposure counter of tube 1.

4.
- Press button “Reset exposers tube 2” to reset the
exposure counter of tube 2.

5.
- The service software use the system time of the
service PC to setup the internal generator clock. Make
sure the time of the PC is correct, before you set the
time inside of the generator.

- Press button “Write time to gen” to copy the system


time of the service PC to the Generator clock.

6.
- Check the generator time by pressing the button “read
time form gen”

- Restart the generator and control the generator clock


again to verify that the new battery will work.

Warning:
The value of the internal x-ray tube heat integrator is also reset.
The tube anode must be cooled down for minimum 20 minutes
before a new exposures is started.

4.2.4 X-Ray Tube Setup via Software


The service PC must be connected to the generator and a backup of all configuration data should be
done before the generator parameters are changed.
The service software has a special sub routine for the tube setup. This can be started in the separate
console window. Menu  settings  Tube setup.
Select the Compatible tube from the list in Chapter 2.23 This list includes the X-Ray Tubes that are
compatible with the HFe Generator. Other similar Medical devices may be compatible with HFe
Generator. Please contact manufacture for more details.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-43
4.2.5 Tube calibration via setup software
The service PC must be connected to the generator and a backup of all configuration data should be done
before the generator parameters are changed.
See the instruction in chapter 3.2.6 Semi-automatic tube calibration

4.2.5.1 General information on tube calibration


Calibration is needed whenever the tube is installed for the first time or if tests show unacceptable
deviations. A tube calibration is also necessary if the following components are changed inside the
generator.
- Filament heating board HZG1.
- High voltage transformer
- High voltage cables with different length to the original ones
- X-ray tube
Upon delivery, the tube is pre-calibrated at the factory, but calibration must be verified during installation.
A calibration of the filament heating current is needed to get accurate tube currents over the entire exposure
time. The calibration must be done for different tube currents. The following figures show the kV and mA
curves from three exposures. Two diagrams from a non-calibrated tube and the last with a calibrated tube.

Filament heating to low. Result: Tube Filament heating to high. Result: Tube Filament heating ok. Result: Constant tube
current is too low at exposure start current is too high at exposure start current over the complete exposure

The filament current is also not proportional to the exposure voltage. To illustrate this dependency a typical
filament emission chart from an x-ray tube is shown below.
The generator has got a semi-automatic calibration function for tube
currents in the steps shown here

The tube voltage during calibration is 70kV. At the end of the calibration
process two exposures will follow at 40kV and 100kV to calibrate the
nonlinearity between tube current and tube voltage.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-44
4.2.6 Tube connection check
Before starting with the calibration check all connections to the tube.
Make sure, that the connection between the converter and the ZST2 board is disconnected before the
generator is switched on. This prevents switching on the high voltage.

- Check that the anode and cathode connection are not interchanged. The filament will heat up using
a 2.5A standby filament current as soon as the generator is switched on. The heated filament is
visible if the tube window is not covered.
- Control the speed and the direction of the anode rotation. For more information see the tube
datasheet and documentation.
- The tubes need to heat up to room temperature prior to calibration.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-45
4.2.7 Semi-automatic tube calibration
The service software has a special sub routine for the calibration. This can be started in the separate
console window. Menu  settings  Filament and AEC setup
An additional window opens which simulates the control panel of the generator.

Exposure parameters Fluoroscopy parameters

Device
buttons

Error
messages

Focus
Calibration buttons
parameters

Prameter
values

This runs in parallel to the main window of the service program. The whole data communication to the
generator is shown in the left window. The curves of tube voltage, tube current and the converter-current
from the last exposure are shown in the oscillogram window after pressing F5 or the left mouse button inside
of the oscillogram field.

For example exposure 70kV, 50mA, 16ms


- red curve tube current
- blue curve tube kV
- green curve buck converter current

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-46
The semi-automatic tube calibration is started by pressing the button “FIL”

The tube calibration process contains 15 steps per focus. Each step is indicated by a parameter number, a
short information text and the range of values.
The tube calibration starts automatically with the large focal spot from parameter number 920 up to 939. The
calibration of the small focus starts from parameter number 900 up to 919. The maximum tube current is
limited by the maximum allowed generator parameters and the tube parameters for the large and the small
focus. Tube currents exceeding these limits do not need any calibration.
The parameter 900 must be inserted manually for the calibration of the small focus. The button “Set”
activates the parameter.
The next figure shows the measuring oscillogram window during the calibration process. The time current
product (mAs) is measured for 10ms starting at 6ms and ending at 16ms.

10ms

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-47
4.2.7.1 Tube Calibration overview
This table gives an overview of the calibration steps starting from parameter number 920 for the large focus.
The last column indicates whether exposures have to be taken or not.
The tube calibration can be done with the service software running on an external PC or directly in the
service mode of the generator via the control panel. Both possibilities are described step by step in separate
chapters of this manual.

Parameter Info text (range) Description X-ray


Parameter 920 is set automatically after pressing the button “FIL”
920 Tube 1, focus 2 standby mA (0..3200mA) Standby filament heating current no
921 Tube 1, focus 2 boost mA (0..600mA) Not used, set to zero no
1
922 Tube 1, focus 2 (2mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 2mA yes )
1
923 Tube 1, focus 2 (5mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 5mA yes )
1
924 Tube 1, focus 2 (10mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 10mA yes )
1
925 Tube 1, focus 2 (20mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 20mA yes )
1
926 Tube 1, focus 2 (50mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 50mA yes )
1
927 Tube 1, focus 2 (100mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 100mA yes )
1
928 Tube 1, focus 2 (200mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 200mA yes )
1
929 Tube 1, focus 2 (320mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 320mA yes )
1
930 Tube 1, focus 2 (500mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 500mA yes )
1
931 Tube 1, focus 2 (650mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 650mA yes )
1
932 Tube 1, focus 2 (800mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 800mA yes )
938 Tube 1, focus 2 fb (50-150%) Fall back adjustment at 40kV yes
939 Tube 1, focus 2 fb (50-150%) Fall back adjustment at 100kV yes
Parameter 900 is set manually
900 Tube 1, focus 1 stadby mA (0..3200mA) Standby filament heating current no
901 Tube 1, focus 2 boost mA (0..600mA) Not used, set to zero no
1
902 Tube 1, focus 2 (2mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 2mA yes )
1
903 Tube 1, focus 2 (5mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 5mA yes )
1
904 Tube 1, focus 2 (10mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 10mA yes )
1
905 Tube 1, focus 2 (20mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 20mA yes )
1
906 Tube 1, focus 2 (50mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 50mA yes )
1
907 Tube 1, focus 2 (100mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 100mA yes )
1
908 Tube 1, focus 2 (200mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 200mA yes )
1
909 Tube 1, focus 2 (320mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 320mA yes )
1
910 Tube 1, focus 2 (500mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 500mA yes )
1
911 Tube 1, focus 2 (650mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 650mA yes )
1
912 Tube 1, focus 2 (800mA) (0..9999mA) Calibration at a tube current of 800mA yes )
918 Tube 1, focus 2 fb (50-150%) Fall back adjustment at 40kV yes
919 Tube 1, focus 2 fb (50-150%) Fall back adjustment at 100kV yes

1
) Calibration only up to the maximum allowed tube current. No x-ray radiation at higher tube current steps

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-48
4.2.7.2 Description of the semi-automatic tube calibration
- Parameter 920 (large focus) / 900 (small focus)
The tube calibration starts from parameter 920 for the large focus and from 900 for the small focus.
The calibration begins with the standby current of the filament heating. The tubes are pre-configured
with a 2500mA heating current. This value is a standard for most tubes and is not supposed to be
changed.
No exposure is needed.
- Parameter 921 (large focus) / 901 (small focus)
The boost of the filament heating current is active within the first 1000ms of the preparation. This
value is added to the heating current to calibrate the heating current to get a shorter preparation time
for old tubes with filaments with heavy coils. This is not used for modern x-ray tubes.
No exposure is needed.
- Parameter 922 – 932 (large focus) / 902 - 912 (small focus)
- Set value before exposure
- Last measured value after exposure

Exposure parameter

Parameter Parameter +/-

filament heating current Measured mAs

Manual adjustment buttons Save

The exposure parameters are preset for each calibration step. The time current product (mAs) is
measured for 10ms starting at 6ms and ending at 16ms. This measured mAs product is the basis for
the half automatic calibration. The proposed filament heating current changes automatically after
each exposure if the measured mAs product value is different to the expected mAs.(The suggested
values for 20mA and below may not be correct for long H.V. cable.(about 30m) In that case it will
require entering values up/down as function measured mA) The Table gives an overview of the
expected mAs and the range of a good calibrated result of the mAs.

Parameter Exposure parameters Expected mAs value Calibrated mAs range


kV mA ms
1
922 / 902 70 2 250 ) 0.020 0.015 – 0.030
1
923 / 903 70 5 100 ) 0.050 0.040 – 0.060
1
924 / 904 70 10 50 ) 0.100 0.090 – 0.110
1
925 / 905 70 20 25 ) 0.200 0.190 – 0.210
926 / 906 70 50 16 0.500 0.485 – 0.515
927 / 907 70 100 16 1.000 0.980 – 1.020
928 / 908 70 200 16 2.000 1.950 – 2.050
929 / 909 70 320 16 3.200 3.150 – 3.250
930 / 910 70 500 16 5.000 4.900 – 5.050
931 / 911 70 650 16 6.500 6.350 – 6.550
932 / 912 70 800 16 8.000 7.700 – 8.050
1
) The minimum mAs product value of the generator is 0.5mAs. The exposure time is
set higher at low mA to keep the limit of 0.5mAs
Table 3-1: Expected mAs values

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-49
Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX
EDITOR HFe page 4-50
- The filament heating current is adjusted automatically after each exposure until the measured mAs
value is close to the expected value. Each automatically or manual changed filament heating current
value must be confirmed by using the button “M”.

- Parameter 938 – 939

At the end of the calibration process two exposures will follow at 40kV and 100kV to calibrate the
nonlinearity between tube current and tube voltage. This is only an adjustment of an internal
correction factor. The generator sets automatically a higher tube current depending on the chosen
tube type. The SVC value is in %.

Parameter Exposure parameters Expected mAs value Calibrated mAs range


kV mA ms
1
938 40 320 ) 16 3.200 3.180 – 3.220
1
939 100 400 ) 16 4.000 3.980 – 4.020
1
918 40 32 ) 16 0.320 0.310 – 0.330
1
919 100 50 ) 16 0.500 0.490 – 0.510
1
) Depends on the tube type and maximum tube power.

- End of calibration

The calibration is stopped by the button “EXIT”. The calibrated filament heating current values are
stored automatically to the EEPROM. Close the console window by pressing the hide button.

After calibration it is recommended to make a second backup of the generator settings.


Choose a new filename for the second backup (for example HFe31234_2011-01-15-02.svc)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-51
4.2.8 Tube calibration with the service software - step by step
This chapter shows each step of the tube calibration. A Varian tube A142 is used in this example. The tube
current for this tube is limited to:
- Small focus: 63mA
- Large focus: 500mA

Service software Action


- After completing the data backup open the virtual control
panel

menu  settings  filament+AEC setup

- Press the button “Fil.” to start the subroutine for the tube
calibration.

- The key code window appears. The default key code is 0.


Press ok.

- Parameter 920

Tube 1, large focus, Standby heating current


Service value: 0mA – 3000mA

- Sets the filament standby heating current. Normal values


are between 2000 and 2800mA.
(See tube datasheet for the correct standby heating
current)

- The default value for the A142 tube is 2500 – 2600mA

- No exposure is needed
- After the Svc. value is set press the button M
- Select the next Parameter 921

- Parameter 921

Tube 1, large focus, filament heating boost


Service value: 0mA – 600mA

- Sets the filament heating boost during the first secound of


preparation
This function is not used with this kind of tube.

- Default is 0000.

- No exposure is needed.
- After the Svc. value is set press the button M
- Select the next Parameter 922

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-52
Service software Action
- Parameter 922

Tube 1, large focus, 2mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


2mA.

- Normally between 2800 – 3300mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value 0.020mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The half automatic calibration sets a new filament heating


current Svc. value automatically after the exposure is
done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs Value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.015 – 0.030

- Select the next parameter 923

Information:
Sometimes the automatic filament heating current calculation may
not find the correct value at the low tube currents 2mA and 5mA. In
this case set the value manually.
-
- Parameter 923

Tube 1, large focus, 5mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


5mA.

- Normally between 3000 – 3400mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value 0.050mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-53
Service software Action
- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs Value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.040 – 0.060

- Select the next parameter 924

Information:
Sometimes the automatic filament heating current calculation may
not find the correct value at the low tube currents 2mA and 5mA. In
this case set the value manually.
- Parameter 924

Tube 1, large focus, 10mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


10mA.

- Normally between 3100 – 3500mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.100mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.090 – 0.110

- Select the next parameter 925

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-54
Service software Action
- Parameter 925

Tube 1, large focus, 20mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


20mA.

- Normally between 3400 – 3700mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.200mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.190 – 0.210

- Select the next parameter 926

- Parameter 926

Tube 1, large focus, 50mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


50mA.

- Normally between 3700 – 4000mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.500mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.490 – 0.510

- Select the next parameter 927

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-55
Service software Action
-
- Parameter 927

- Tube 1, large focus, 100mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


100mA.

- Normally between 3900 – 4300mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 1.000mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.950 – 1.020

- Select the next parameter 928

- Parameter 928

- Tube 1, large focus, 200mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


200mA.

- Normally between 4100 – 4500mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 2.000mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 1.900 – 2.100

- Select the next parameter 928

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-56
Service software Action
-
- Parameter 929

- Tube 1, large focus, 320mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


320mA.

- Normally between 4300 – 4700mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 3.200mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 3.100 – 3.300

- Select the next parameter 930

- Parameter 930

- Tube 1, large focus, 500mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


500mA.

- Normally between 4600 – 5000mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 5.000mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 4.950 – 5.050

- Select the next parameter 931

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-57
Service software Action
- Parameter 931

- Tube 1, large focus, 650mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 500mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 500mA.

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

The saved filament current needs to be higher than the


last calibrated tube current. The difference to the last
heating current should be set about 150mA higher.

In this case 4803mA + 150mA = 4953mA

Set Svc. val = 4950mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 932

- Parameter 932

- Tube 1, large focus, 800mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 500mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 500mA.

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

Set this value to the same value as in the step before.

Set Svc. val = 4950mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 938

- Parameter 938

- Tube 1, large focus, 40kV, 320mA tube current

- Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube


current at low exposure voltage.

The tube current is set to a larger value depending on the


kW ratings of the tube.

- Normal values are between 88% - 99%.

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the


correction factor in +/-1% steps until the expected mAs
value of 3.200mAs is reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-58
Service software Action
- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new correction


factor Svc. value automatically after the exposure is done
depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new correction factor and


repeat the exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Select the next parameter 939

-
- Parameter 939

- Tube 1, large focus, 100kV, 320mA tube current

- Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube


current at high exposure voltage.

The tube current is set to a larger value depending on the


kW ratings of the tube.

- Normal values are between 101% -115%.

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the


correction factor in +/-1% steps until the expected mAs
value of 3.200mAs is reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new correction


factor Svc. value automatically after the exposure is done
depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new correction factor and


repeat the exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Select the parameter 900 to start the calibration of the


small focus.

Parameter 940 generats the error “generator not ready”.


In this case, restart the generator and after the selftest of
the generatro press also the Restart button in the service
software. No calibration data are lost.
- Parameter 900

Tube 1, small focus, Standby heating current


Service value: 0mA – 3000mA

- Sets filament standby heating current. Normal values are


between 2000 and 2800mA.
(See tube datasheet for the correct standby heating
current)

- The default value of the A142 tube is 2500 – 2600mA

- No exposure is needed
- After the Svc. value is set press the button M
- Select the next Parameter 901

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-59
Service software Action
- Parameter 901

Tube 1, small focus, filament heating boost


Service value: 0mA – 600mA

- Sets the filament heating boost during the first second of


preparation
This function is not used with this kind of tube.

- Default 0000.

- No exposure is needed.
- After the Svc. value is set press the button M
- Select the next Parameter 902

- Parameter 902

Tube 1, small focus, 2mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


2mA.

- Normally between 2800 – 3300mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value 0.020mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The half automatic calibration sets a new filament heating


current Svc. value automatically after the exposure is
done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat the exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.015 – 0.030

- Select the next parameter 923


Information:
Sometimes the automatic filament heating current calculation will
not find the correct value at the low tube currents 2mA and 5mA. In
this case set the value manually.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-60
Service software Action
- Parameter 903

Tube 1, small focus, 5mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


5mA.

- Normally between 3000 – 3400mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value 0.050mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until mA curve is flat and the expected
mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.040 – 0.060

- Select the next parameter 904

Information:
Sometimes the automatic filament heating current calculation will
not find the correct value at the low tube currens 2mA and 5mA. In
this case set the value manually.
-
- Parameter 904

Tube 1, small focus, 10mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


10mA.

- Normally between 3100 – 3500mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.100mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until mA curve is flat and the expected
mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.090 – 0.110

- Select the next parameter 905

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-61
Service software Action
- Parameter 905

Tube 1, small focus, 20mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


20mA.

- Normally between 3400 – 3700mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.200mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until mA curve is flat and the expected
mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.190 – 0.210

- Select the next parameter 906

-
- Parameter 906

Tube 1, small focus, 50mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


50mA.

- Normally between 3700 – 4000mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.500mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending of the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until mA curve is flat and the expected
mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.490 – 0.510

- Select the next parameter 907

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-62
Service software Action
- Parameter 907

- Tube 1, small focus, 100mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA
The maximum tube current for the small focus is limited to
63mA. The generator reduces the set value of the tube
current automatically.

- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of


63mA.

- Normally between 3900 – 4300mA. (depends on the tube)

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the filament


current until the expected mAs value of 0.630mAs is
reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new filament


heating current Svc. value automatically after the
exposure is done depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new filament current and


repeat exposures until mA curve is flat and the expected
mAs value is reached.

- Calibrated mAs range: 0.610 – 0.640mAs

- Select the next parameter 908

- Parameter 908

- Tube 1, small focus, 200mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 63mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 63mA.

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

The saved filament current needs to be larger than the


last calibrated tube current. The differenc to the last
heating current should be set about 150mA larger.

In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA

Set Svc. val = 4170mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 909

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-63
Service software Action
- Parameter 909

- Tube 1, small focus, 320mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 63mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 63mA..

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

Set this value to the same value as in the step before.

Set Svc. val = 4170mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 910

- Parameter 910

- Tube 1, small focus, 500mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 63mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to to 63mA..

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

Set this value to the same value as in the step before.

Set Svc. val = 4170mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 911

-
- Parameter 911

- Tube 1, small focus, 650mA tube current


Service Value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 63mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 63mA..

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

Set this value to the same value as in the step before.

Set Svc. val = 4170mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 912

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-64
Service software Action
- Parameter 911

- Tube 1, small focus, 800mA tube current


Service value: 0mA – 9999mA

- The maximum tube current is limited to 63mA. The set


value of the mA is reduced to 63mA..

This step will not be calibrated. No exposure is needed.

Set this value to the same value as in the step before.

Set Svc. val = 4170mA manually

- Press M and select the next parameter 918

- Parameter 918

- Tube 1, small focus, 40kV, 32mA tube current

- Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube


current at low exposure voltage.

The tube current is set to a larger value depending on the


kW ratings of the tube.

- Normal values are between 89% - 99%.

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the


correction factor in +/-1% steps until the expected mAs
value of 0.320mAs is reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new correction


factor Svc. value automatically after the exposure is done
depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new correction factor and


repeat the exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- Select the next parameter 919

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-65
Service software Action
- Parameter 919

- Tube 1, small focus, 100kV, 50mA tube current

- Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube


current at high exposure voltage.

The tube current is set to a larger value depending on the


kW ratings of the tube.

- Normal values are between 101% -115%.

- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the


correction factor in +/-1% steps until the expected mAs
value of 0.500mAs is reached.

- This step needs exposures to be taken.

- Start exposure

- The semi automatic calibration sets a new correction


factor Svc. value automatically after the exposure is done
depending on the measured Svc. mAs.

- Press button M to accept the new correction factor and


repeat exposures until the mA curve is flat and the
expected mAs value is reached.

- The calibration is now finished

Press the button “Exit” to leave the calibration routine and


than the Button “Hide” to close the window.

The calibrated tube data can be displayed in one window.

Menu  settings  filament settings…

Press button “Read from gen”

A backup of the generator settings should be made after the tube


calibration.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-66
4.2.9 Tube calibration via control panel - step by step
This chapter shows each step of the tube calibration operated via the control panel. A Varian tube A142 is
used in this example. The tube current for this tube is limited to:
- Small focus: 63mA
- Large focus: 500mA

4.2.9.1 Description of the control panel display during calibration


The display shows in the first line the parameter number with a description and the present value. The
second line shows either the set exposure parameters or after taking an exposure the measured values.
For description purposes some displayed contents are marked
- Yellow: Changed parameter number, automatically/manually changed Values, measured exposure
values
- Red: Limited exposure parameters

Parameter number Parameter text Parameter value

927:tube1,foc2(100mA)(0..9999) :4160
- Prior to exposure R 3: 70kV 100mA 16ms

Exposure parameter
Changed parameter value

927:tube1,foc2(100mA)(0..9999) :4169
- After exposure R 3: 70kV 99.7mA 16ms #0.999mAs 30

Measured tube current Measured mAs Info Timer

Setup mode Action


- Switch off the generator
- Connect the service dongle to the control panel, at the
connector of the external hand switch
- Press and hold the key on the control panel during
switching on the generator.

- In the default settings of the FLXIS systems the device 0


E050: device not ready (CAN) is disabled. This device allowes exposures without
synchronisaton with the FLXIS system. The setup mode
of the generator starts with an error message E050 if this
device is not enabled.
3.8mA Please confirm this error message during the start phase
of the setup mode using button and press the button
.
301:setup - :302
After this the device will be automatically enabled and the
setup mode starts normally.

301:setup - :920 - Select parameter number 920 and press to start the
calibration of the large focus

Calibration of the large focus


- Parameter 920
920:tube1, stdby focus2 mA(0..3200) :2500 Sets the filament heating current during standby
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Normally 2500mA
- Press and select next parameter with button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-67
Setup mode Action
- Parameter 921
921:tube1, boost focus2 mA(0..600) :0000 Sets the boost current during preparation
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Normally not used
- Press and select next parameter with button
- Parameter 922
922:tube1,foc2(2mA)(0..9999) :2980 Calibration of the 2mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Normally 2800mA – 3300mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.020mAs
- Start exposures and press to confirm the value for
the new calculated filament heating current.
922:tube1,foc2(2mA)(0..9999) :2972 - The filament heating current changes automatically after
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms #0.028mAs 30 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
0.015 – 0.030mAs
- Press and select next parameter with button
- Parameter 923
923:tube1,foc2(5mA)(0..9999) :3204 Calibration of the 5mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 5.0mA 100ms - Normally 3000mA – 3400mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.050mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
923:tube1,foc2(5mA)(0..9999) :3204 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 5.1mA 100ms #0.059mAs 30 0.040 – 0.060mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 924
924:tube1,foc2(10mA)(0..9999) :3370 Calibration of the 10mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 10mA 50ms - Normally 3100mA – 3500mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.100mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
924:tube1,foc2(10mA)(0..9999) :3376 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 10.2mA 50ms #0.107mAs 30 0.090 – 0.110mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 925
925:tube1,foc2(20mA)(0..9999) :3370 Calibration of the 20mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 20mA 25ms - Normally 3400mA – 3700mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.200mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
925:tube1,foc2(20mA)(0..9999) :3376 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 20.3mA 25ms #0.199mAs 30 0.190 – 0.210mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 926
926:tube1,foc2(50mA)(0..9999) :3820 Calibration of the 50mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 50mA 16ms - Normally 3700mA – 4000mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.500mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
926:tube1,foc2(50mA)(0..9999) :3831 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 48.8mA 16ms #0.492mAs 30 0.490 – 0.510mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 927
927:tube1,foc2(100mA)(0..9999) :4160 Calibration of the 100mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 100mA 16ms - Normally 3900mA – 4300mA
- Expected measured mAs value 1.000mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
927:tube1,foc2(100mA)(0..9999) :4169 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 99.7mA 16ms #0.999mAs 30 0.950 – 1.050mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-68
Setup mode Action
- Parameter 928
928:tube1,foc2(200mA)(0..9999) :4430 Calibration of the 200mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 200mA 16ms - Normally 4100mA – 4500mA
- Expected measured mAs value 2.000mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
928:tube1,foc2(200mA)(0..9999) :4420 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 200mA 16ms #2.012mAs 30 1.950 – 2.050mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 929
929:tube1,foc2(320mA)(0..9999) :4620 Calibration of the 320mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 320mA 16ms - Normally 4100mA – 4500mA
- Expected measured mAs value 2.000mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
929:tube1,foc2(320mA)(0..9999) :4610 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 320mA 16ms #3.216mAs 30 3.150 – 3.250mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 930
930:tube1,foc2(500mA)(0..9999) :4800 Calibration of the 500mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 500mA 16ms - Normally 4600mA – 5000mA
- Expected measured mAs value 2.000mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
930:tube1,foc2(500mA)(0..9999) :4803 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 500mA 16ms #4.945mAs 30 4.950 – 5.050mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 931
Calibration of the 650mA tube current. Tube is limited to
500mA tube current. This tube current will be not
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
931:tube1,foc2(650mA)(0..9999) :4950 approx. 150mA higher than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 500mA 16ms
In this case 4803mA + 150mA = 4953mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select next parameter with button
- Parameter 932
Calibration of the 800mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 500mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
932:tube1,foc2(800mA)(0..9999) :4950 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 500mA 16ms In the shown case 4803mA + 150mA = 4953mA
Set this value manually to 4950mA
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 938
Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube
current at low exposure voltage.
938:tube1, focus2 fb(50%..150%) :92 - Normal values are between 88% - 99%.
- Expected measured mAs value 3.200mAs
R 3: 40kV 320mA 16ms
- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
value of 3.200mAs is reached.
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated correction factor.
- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
938:tube1, focus2 fb(50%..150%) :93 correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
R 3: 40kV 320mA 16ms #3.173mAs 30 value of 3.200mAs is reached.
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-69
Setup mode Action
- Parameter 939
Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube
current at high exposure voltage.
939:tube1, focus2 fb(50%..150%) :92 - Normal values are between 101% - 115%.
- Expected measured mAs value 3.200mAs
R 3:100kV 320mA 16ms
- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
value of 3.200mAs is reached.
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
939:tube1, focus2 fb(50%..150%) :107 the new calculated correction factor.
R 3:100kV 320mA 16ms #3.168mAs 30 - The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
value of approx. 3.200mAs is reached

The calibration of the large focus is now finished.


Start now the calibration of the small focus

301:setup - :302 - Press button to switching back to parameter 301

301:setup - :900 - Select the parameter number 900 and press to start
the calibration of the small focus

Calibration of the small focus


- Parameter 900
Sets the filament heating current during standby
900:tube1, stdby focus1 mA(0..3200) :2500 - Normally 2500mA
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 901
Sets the boost current during preparation
901:tube1, boost focus1 mA(0..600) :0000 - Normally not used
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 902
902:tube1,foc1(2mA)(0..9999) :2900 Calibration of the 2mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms - Normally 2800mA – 3300mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.020mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
902:tube1,foc1(2mA)(0..9999) :2906 0.015 – 0.030mAs
R 3: 70kV 2.0mA 250ms #0.029mAs 30
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 903
903:tube1,foc1(5mA)(0..9999) :3120 Calibration of the 5mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 5.0mA 100ms - Normally 3000mA – 3400mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.050mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
903:tube1,foc1(5mA)(0..9999) :3120 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 5.1mA 100ms #0.057mAs 30 0.040 – 0.060mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 904
904:tube1,foc1(10mA)(0..9999) :3280 Calibration of the 10mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 10mA 50ms - Normally 3100mA – 3500mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.100mAs

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-70
Setup mode Action

- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of


the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
904:tube1,foc1(10mA)(0..9999) :3290 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 10.2mA 50ms #0.105mAs 30 0.090 – 0.110mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 905
905:tube1,foc1(20mA)(0..9999) :3470 Calibration of the 20mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 20mA 25ms - Normally 3400mA – 3700mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.200mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
905:tube1,foc1(20mA)(0..9999) :3479 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 20.2mA 25ms #0.206mAs 30 0.190 – 0.210mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 906
906:tube1,foc1(50mA)(0..9999) :3740 Calibration of the 50mA tube current
R 3: 70kV 50mA 16ms - Normally 3700mA – 4000mA
- Expected measured mAs value 0.500mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
906:tube1,foc1(50mA)(0..9999) :3744 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 48.9mA 16ms #0.499mAs 30 0.490 – 0.510mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

Parameter 907

The maximum tube current for the small focus is limited to


63mA. The generator reduces the set value of the tube
907:tube1,foc1(100mA)(0..9999) :4025 current automatically.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms
- Calibration of the filament heating at a tube current of
63mA.
Normally 3900mA – 4300mA
- Expected measured mAs value is 0.630mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated filament heating current.
- The filament heating current changes automatically after
907:tube1,foc1(100mA)(0..9999) :4020 each exposure until the measured mAs is in the range of
R 3: 70kV 62.5mA 16ms #0.627mAs 30 0.610 – 0.640mAs
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 908
Calibration of the 200mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 63mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
908:tube1,foc1(200mA)(0..9999) :4170 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 909
Calibration of the 320mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 63mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
909:tube1,foc1(320mA)(0..9999) :4170 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-71
Setup mode Action
- Parameter 910
Calibration of the 500mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 63mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
910:tube1,foc1(500mA)(0..9999) :4170 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 911
Calibration of the 650mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 63mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
911:tube1,foc1(650mA)(0..9999) :4170 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 912
Calibration of the 320mA tube current. The tube is limited
to a tube current of 63mA. This tube current will not be
calibrated but the filament current must be set manually
912:tube1,foc1(800mA)(0..9999) :4170 approx. 150mA larger than the last calibrated one.
R 3: 70kV 63mA 16ms In this case 4020mA + 150mA = 4170mA
Set this value manually without starting an exposure
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 918
918:tube1, focus1 fb(50%..150%) :92 Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube
current at low exposure voltage.
R 3: 40kV 32mA 16ms - Normal values are between 88% - 99%.
- Expected measured mAs value 0.320mAs
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
the new calculated correction factor.
- The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
938:tube1, focus1 fb(50%..150%) :93 correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
R 3: 40kV 32.2mA 16ms #3.173mAs 30 value of 0.320mAs is reached.
- Press and select the next parameter by using button

- Parameter 919
939:tube1, focus1 fb(50%..150%) :106 Calibration of the correction factor in percent of the tube
current at high exposure voltage.
R 3:100kV 50mA 16ms - Normal values are between 101% - 115%.
- Expected measured mAs value 0.500mAs.
- Start exposure and press to confirm the value of
939:tube1, focus1 fb(50%..150%) :107 the new calculated correction factor.
R 3: 40kV 48.8mA 16ms #0.496mAs 30 - The semi automatic tube calibration changes the
correction factor in steps of +/-1% until the expected mAs
value of approx. 0.500mAs is reached

The calibration of the small focus is now finished.


At last the calibration data must be stroed.

301:setup - :302 - Press button to switch back to parameter 301

302:setup save -> ‘M’ - Press button to prepare the storage.

301:setup – data stored :302 - Press button to store the calibration data.

- Switch off the generator


- Remove the dongle
- If possible, make a backup of the generator data

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-72
4.2.10 Possible errors during calibration
1. The tube heating current is too low. Therefore the resulting tube current is also too low and the automatic
calculation of the next filament heating current will not work. If the tube current is too low the high voltage is
also too high at the beginning of the exposure.

In this case the SVC value will not change after an exposure is taken. Increase the SVC value manually in
100mA steps until the automatic calculation of the tube heating current will start again. Use the marked
arrow button to increase the value manually in larger steps. Press the button M after changing the value
manually.

2. The tube heating current is too high. Therefore the resulting tube current is also too high. The generator
may stop the exposure displaying the error messages E049 “Tube mA too high”. Reduce the filament
heating current in steps of 100mA until the error message will not appear again and the current calculation
will work.3. Communication between service PC and generator breaks down during calibration.
The error message E012 appears on the display of the control panel.
Switch off the generator and close the service software. Start the generator and the service software again.
Open the backup file and finish the calibration starting from the last calibrated step.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 4-73
5 Error Handling
5.1 Warning signals and error messages

5.1.1 Acoustic signals


With the built-in buzzer, the user is informed about special conditions of the installation:
• A short sound signalizes the end of an x-ray exposure.
• A modulated sound lasting 1s in case of an error.

5.1.2 Optical Indication signals


The following optical indication signals are used:
• If radiation is switched on the radiation display is illuminated on the panel.
• A faulty exposure or an error illuminates the yellow LED in key No. 15.
• The other keys possess green LEDs which show their status of activation.

5.1.3 Error messages


If an error occurs, please exactly obey to the instructions. Never open the genertor encusure covers, unless
it is done by service personne..

CAUTION
Even if the generator is switched off there are still components, inside of the generator
cabinet, which are electrically live!
Only qualified and trained service personnel may open the cabinets!
Incorrect handling can result in danger to life!

5.1.4 Table of error messages

message Explanation *
1 Error tube kV max 2
2 error control A max 2
3 error tube mA max 2
4 Error tube +-kV diff 2
5 Error tube +-mA diff 2
6 Error ROM test 1
7 Error RAM test 1
8 Error unknown 2
9 Error no Tube kV 2
10 Error tube kV too high 2
11 Error inverter overload ( > 150000WS) 2
12 Error comm. send timeout 2
13 Error checksum E²Prom 1
14 Error watchdog 2
15 Error comm. receive timeout 2
16 Error E²Prom wait timeout 1
17 Error filament system 2
18 Error DAP system 1
19 Filament parameter anomaly in the E²Prom
20 Error +-15V low 2
21 Error +5V low (+-5%) 2
22 Error key is on (during start of the generator) 2
23 Error XRAY key is on (during start of the generator) 2

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-2
message Explanation *
24 MAs max 3
25 Error exposure too short 3
26 Error generator not ready 1
27 Warning service (Service-Interval) 1
28 Error no Tube mA (< 50% after 30ms) 2
29 Error tube > 70°C 2/3
30 Info To save data push 'M'
31 Error 'NOT' signal 2
32 Error door open 3
33 Error exp. time > 6.3s 3
34 Error exp. time > 3.2s (with AEC) 2/3
35 Error exp. time < 2ms (with AEC) 2/3
36 Error AEC exposure break (with AEC) 3
37 Error dose too low after 50ms (with AEC) 3
38 Error pulse delay too long (with AEC, > 2sec) 2
39 Error exp. prepare timeout 3
40 Error device ready timeout 2
41 Error starter timeout 2
42 Error grid is on 2
43 Error RTC checksum, Batt. low 1
44 Error HSS system 2
45 Error no main current 2
46 Error exp. stopped by user 3
47 controller - E²prom verify 1
48 Wrong tube position 3
49 Tube mA too high 2
50 “Device not ready (CAN)”” 2
51 No BUS-Signal from AEC 2
52 FLXIS not ready 2
53 ! Anode heat content >100% ! 3
55 Temperature Error 3
56 Dose rate too high 3
61 Error Comm. receiver overrun 2
62 Error Comm. transmit. overrun 2
63 Error Comm. controller 2
64 CAN system 2
65 bus system 1
67 SCB Communication timeout 1
68 SCB wrong version 1
90 HSS2 fault 1
91 HSS2 Low Voltage Power Supply 1
92 HSS2 output short or heavy load 1
93 HSS2 phase over current 1
94 HSS2 phase under current 1
95 HSS2 DC bus under voltage 1
96 HSS2 excessive run timeout 2
97 HSS2 configuration error 1

1* = call service
2* = call service if problem appears several times
3* = warning, repairable by the user

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-3
Table 4-1: List of messages

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-4
5.2 Potential cause for Error and handling solutions
Error Error text Description
001 tube kV max (>166kV or >133kV, Signal 'URMAX' on the ZST2 board).
Possible causes:
- Jumper X9 on the ZST2 is in the wrong position.
- kV overshoots at the beginning. Reduce the start
power by using the potentiometer R52 on the
ZST2
- Check tube calibration
002 control A max Control A higher than 250A
Possible causes:
- broken IGBT in the converter
- Spark over in the tube
- Check tube calibration
003 tube mA max (larger than 900mA, signal 'IRMAX' on the ZST2).
Possible causes:
- Check filament current calibration
- Check tube calibration
- Spark over in the tube
- Broken high voltage cable
004 tube +-kV diff (larger than 20kV, signal 'URDIFF' on the ZST2). This error only
happens during radiation. Control the kV curve by using the
service software at exposures with low kV and low mA (for
example 40kV / 50mA) and increase the kV at each exposure until
the error appears. Measure the signals –UR and +UR on the ZST2
board (test point X24 and X25) and check the difference at
different kV.
Possible causes:
- Check the connection between HV transformer
and the board BUS. Check also the shielding of
this cable. The shielding must be connected on
both sides.
- Defective or old high-voltage cables.
Check the connection pins of the high voltage
cables on the side of the transformer and of the
tube. A bad contact spring or too much silicon can
cause this error.
- Defective high-voltage transformer

005 tube +-mA diff (larger than 200mA, signal 'IRDIFF' on the ZST2). This error may
occur only during radiation.
Possible causes:
- Control the connection between HV-trafo and PCB
BUS. Check also the shielding of this cable. The
shielding must be connected on both sides.
- Defective or old high-voltage cables.
Check the connectors on both sides. The affected
parts must be replaced if sooting is visible.
Check the cables over their entire length
- Defective high-voltage transformer

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-5
Error Error text Description
006 ROM test The check-up of the setup data in the Flash of the microcontroller
(ZST2) is faulty. Checked after switching on the generator.
A possible cause:
- Damaged microcontroller.
007 RAM test The check-up of the RAM of the microcontroller (ZST2) is faulty.
Checked after switching on the generator.
A possible cause:
- Damaged microcontroller
008 Error code 8 is indicated, if the error number is higher than 15.
Only the first 15 errors are indicated on the ZST2 board. (LED V58-
V61)
009 no Tube kV 1ms after start of exposure, the kV must be larger than 10kV and
after 30ms larger than 50% of the desired value.
Possible causes:
- Tube current is too high at the start of exposure
- Check tube calibration
- broken IGBT in the converter
- broken fuse on board ANS2
- broken fuse F6 at mains distribution
- Loose rubber connector on the back side of the
converter. (Power supply cable at the bottom right
corner of the mains distribution.)

010 tube kV too high. 3ms after start of exposure, the kV may not be higher than 125% of
the desired value. (In setup mode 150%)
Possible causes:
- Tube current is too low at the start of exposure.
This creates an overshoot during the start of
exposure.
- Check the tube calibration.
The uncalibrated tube current must be set +150mA
larger than the last calibrated tube current.
Example:
..
320mA(IR) 4232mA(IHeat) calibrated
500mA(IR) 4404mA(IHeat) calibrated
650mA(IR) 4554mA(IHeat) uncalibrated
800mA(IR) 4554mA(IHeat) uncalibrated

011 inverter overload ( The maximum permissible energy quantity of the converter has
160000Ws) been exceeded.
A possible cause:
- Too many exposures in a short time.
Switch off. The generator must be cooled down.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-6
Error Error text Description
012 “send timeout” This error appears if 5 seconds after transmitting a message no
positive acknowledgement from the receiver has been sent back.
with extension (CAN061 –
CAN061 High speed starter HSS1
CAN066 or COM1).
CAN063 second control desk
CAN064 Patient system
CAN065 AEC
COM1 Service PC
Possible causes:
- CAN bus device is enabled in the software but not
installed. Chang the settings.
- CAN bus device is not connected. Check RJ45
cables to the devices.
- No response from the Service PC (COM1). Restart
the generator and the service software. Update the
driver if an USB-to-serial converter is used. In this
case use a different USB connector of the PC.

013 E²Prom checksum The setup data of the generator are checked after powering on.
Possible causes:
- Faulty EEPROM on the ZST2 board.
- Disconnection to the service PC during data
transfer to the generator.
Try to restart the generator and the service program.

First download all data from the ZST2 of the faulty EEPROM for
later troubleshooting.
Second step: Load an older backup from the service PC or from
the generator CD and transfer the complete file to the generator.
Start the generator again. This data are factory data. The tube
needs to be re-calibrated.
014 watchdog No reaction of the generator software for more than 260ms.
A possible cause:
- Damaged microcontroller

015 Receive timeout” with This error appears if no messages were received 5 seconds after
extension (CAN061 – starting the communication.
CAN066 or COM1).
Possible causes:
- see error number 12

016 E²Prom wait timeout After powering on the EEPROM is checked every 100ms for
readiness.
A possible cause:
- The EPROM D4 on the ZST2 is damaged or not
correctly fixed in the socked.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-7
Error Error text Description
017 filament system The filament heating board is in error state.
The signal 'FIL_ERR\' is set on the HZG1 and the ZST2 board to
indicate the error mode.
Possible causes:
- An overcurrent on the filament heating board is
detected. LED V7 (red).
The filament current has been larger than 8,5A or
if the difference between the set value and present
value is more than 1A.
Get the set value and present value and start the
generator again. These values must be equal. The
MOSFET could be broken, if the error appears
during switching on.
- An offset between the set value and the present
value of the filament heating current. LED V33
(red)
Restart the generator and get the set and present
value during standby. The LED V27 (yellow)
indicates an offset. The error is set if the time of
the offset is lasting longer than 500ms.
If the error appears immediately after restart:
- Check the filaments inside the tube.
- Check the high voltage cables. (Internal cable
break, broken terminals (pins))
- Check fuse F1 on the HZG1
- If the LED V27 turns on during preparation, the
filament of the tube needs a higher voltage. In this
case check the voltage of the pre-transformer in
the back of the generator (behind the BUS board).
The standard voltage is 52VAC. Some tubes need
56VAC or 60VAC.
- The +/-15V power supply is faulty. Check the
Fuses F3 and F4 on the BUS board.

018 DAP system Approximately 5s after switching on the measuring chamber it


supplies a group of pulses. These are examined by the ZST2.
The number of pulses may not differ more than +/- 2% from the
parameter value of code number 846.
Possible causes:
- Wrong value in the parameter address 846. See
specification of the measuring chamber.
- Deviation from the self-check value. The current
value can be picked up via the service PC
(Settings->kV control-> DAP test value).

019 filament parameter. The filament parameters in the EEPROM are faulty (checked by
the software). All filament heat data will be set to 0 and no tube
current will be possible.
Rewrite the heating parameters to the EEPROM

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-8
Error Error text Description
020 +/-15V low The +/-15V power supply of the ZST2 board is faulty.
Possible causes:
- The fuses F3 and F4 are broken. The LEDs V41
(+15V) and V8 (-15V) are off
- +/-15V are asymmetric, check voltage on the ZST2
board TP38=+15V, TP14=-15V, TP40=GND)
021 +5V low The +5V supply voltage of the ZST2 board is faulty.

022 key is on : If a button is pressed on the control desk during powering on.
Start the control desk setup and check the functionality of the
buttons.
(Connect the dongle to the control desk and start the generator
without pressing any button, except the “switch on button”. Now it
is possible to control each button on the desk by pressing it. )
023 XRAY key is on : If the x-ray hand switch is pressed during powering on.
Start the control desk setup and check the functionality of the two
x-ray hand switches.
(Connect the dongle to the control desk and start the generator
without pressing any button except the “switch on button”)
024 mAs max The maximum mAs product is reached for systems using pulsed
exposure. The maximum mAs is 1200mAs during one exposure
sequence.
025 exposure too short Currently not used
026 Generator not ready. If the generator works with two tubes this error message appears if
there is no feedback from the switch in the high voltage
transformer.
Possible causes:
- Broken fuse F7 in the main distribution of the
generator.
- Check the cable connection to the transformer

027 Service interval. This warning is caused by two different events:


1) If the maximum number of exposures is reached. The
number is set in the generator setup. This message is
produced only after powering on the generator. The tube
no. is displayed. (tubeX)
2) If the automatic filament current calibration differ more than
5% from the beginning filament current this message
appears periodically every 60 minutes.
Possible causes / solutions:
- reset the exposure counter for tube 1 and 2 and
reset the service interval message. (Setup
Program -> settings -> statistic)
- Normal aging of the tube. Recalibrate the tube.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-9
Error Error text Description
028 no Tube mA This error appears, if the tube current does not reach 50% of the
set value during the first 30ms of x-ray radiation.
Possible causes:
- This error appears sometimes during the
calibration. This is normal. In this case set the
heating current parameter manually.
- Check the tube calibration
029 tube > 70°C The tube reached its maximum working temperature. No more
exposures are possible.
This message appears with the beginning of the preparation
phase.
030 . Used for information texts.
031 NOT Signal. This error is caused by two different conditions. After switching on,
the emergency loop has to be open and later during preparation
the emergency loop has to be closed. The signal 'NOT' on the
ZST2 is transferred via X7.C16. It is put through the BA6 and the
control panel.

Check the yellow LED V62 on the ZST2 board. It has to be


switched on if the preparation button is pressed.
Possible causes:
- Wrong setting of the jumpers X1, X8, on the ZST2
board.
X1 has to be open if AEC is installed
X1 has to be closed without AEC
X8 has to be closed
- Faulty hand switch
- Broken data cable connecting the control panel.

032 door open The signal 'DOOR'. It is requested during the preparation phase.
Possible causes:
- Connector X8 on the sub-distribution is open
although no door contact is installed.
- The flat interface cable between NAG2 and ZST2
is damaged.

033 exp. time > 6.3s If the exposure doesn’t stop after 6.3s the backup timer sets this
error.
Possible causes / solutions:
- Check Jumper X46 on the ZST2 (has to be open)
X46 reduces the time of the backup timer to less
than 100ms (only for factory tests).
- Defective Microcontroller board MP16.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-10
Error Error text Description
034 exp. time > 3.2s This error is produced by the BA6 and transferred to the generator
(ZST2).
Possible causes:
- Wrong exposure parameter selection by the
operator.
- Switching off dose has not been reached

035 exp. time < 2ms This error is produced by the BA6 and transferred to the generator
(ZST2).
Possible causes:
- Wrong exposure parameter selection
- Wrong measuring field selection
- Direct radiation onto measuring field

036 AEC exposure break Exposure stopped by user. The operator released the hand switch
before the exposure time is expired.
037 dose too low after 50ms The BA6 examines after 50ms whether the adjusted %-value of the
switching off dose has been reached. This way it also can be
tested whether the emitter is in the correct position. This error is
produced by the BA6 and transferred to the generator (ZST2).
Possible causes:
- Too low selected photograph parameters
- Check tube calibration

038 pulse delay too long If the delay time during two exposures is too long during the pulsed
exposure mode.
039 exp. prepare timeout The maximum preparation time is adjustable via the setup program
from 2s to 20s.
If the operator presses the preparation button for a long time this
error will be set. This error is used to save the filament of the tube
040 device ready timeout No response from the active exposure device (bucky) if the second
stage of the exposure button is pressed.
The maximum response time is adjustable via the setup program
from 1s to 20s.

041 starter timeout The maximum time for the starter is adjustable via the setup
program from 1000ms to 2500ms.
Possible causes:
- broken fuse F2 on the NAG2 board
- check the stator connection to the tube
- If a high speed starter is installed check the error
LEDs on the HSS1 board.
042 grid is on The error appears if the grid is running or the input signal “bucky”
on the NAG2 is active during the generator is switched on. Check
the external bucky devices. For test purposes remove all interface
cables from the NAG2 board.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-11
Error Error text Description
043 RTC checksum, Batt. low Error caused by the check sum test of the real-time clock
component D5 on the ZST2. The component is possibly missing or
defective.
Only active if the heat integrator is enabled.
Use the setup program to reset all errors and reset the clock again.
Press the button “Reset all” in the statistic window of the setup
program. After this, write the time to the generator. Change the
battery if the error appears again.
044 starter system The stator current is monitored all the time. If a stator current is
detected during standby or during exposure/ fluoroscopy during the
pulse pause of the low speed starter, this error appears.
This error is produced, if during generator standby the
signals,‚I_W‘(X6.C24, ZST) and ‚I_U‘(X6.A26, ZST) are active.

Possible causes:
- a faulty Interface board NAG2
- Check the solid state relay U2 on the NAG2 board.

045 no main current If the current in the converter is too low during exposure.
A possible cause:
- Open cable between ZST2 and ANS2. Check the
connection between the ZST2 and the ANS2
board inside the converter
- One of more phase of the main supply is missing.
Check automatic circuit breaker F1
- check fuse F6 on the sub distribution
- check the power supply cable to the converter.

046 exposure stopped by user This error appears, if the operator stops the exposure before the
end of set exposure time.
047 controller – E²prom verify The flash memory of the µC and the E²Prom are checked for
updates after switching on.
048 Wrong tube position Not used
049 Tube mA too high This error appears, if the tube current has reached more than 50%
of the set value during the first 30ms of x-ray radiation.
Possible causes / solutions:
- This error appears sometimes during the
calibration. This is normal. In this case set the
heating current parameter manually.
- Check the tube calibration

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-12
Error Error text Description
050 Device not ready (CAN) This error message appears under two conditions:
or
Device not ready (CAN),HSS
a. If a chosen anatomic program in the organ
automatic is programmed for a disabled x-ray
device (device button).

Reprogram the anatomic program or change the


organ automatic by using the service software.

b. If the option “Anode high speed (150Hz)” is


enabled in the tube settings but no optional High
speed starter (HSS1) is built in the generator. The
error message has got the extension “…,HSS”

Disable this option in the tube settings by using the


service software.

051 No BUS-Signal from AEC If the automatic exposure control board (BA6 / BA7) stops the
exposure by the signal BUS immediately and additionally with a
software command via CAN BUS. The error message E051 is set if
the exposure stops only by a software command without the
hardware signal BUS.
The cause can be an hardware defect on the BA6 or the ZST2.
Check the optocoupler U1 on the AEC board BA6 or BA7. The
LED V36 signalizes the status of the signal BUS.
052 FLXIS not ready Only for fluoroscopy generators if a FLXIS system is installed. The
FLXIS system is controlled by serial commands. This message
appears after one minute after switching on if the FLXIS does not
boot correctly
053 !Anode heat content >100% ! Maximum heat storage capacity of the tube anode is reached. The
tube needs time to cool down. Additional exposures will damage
the anode.
This message appears every minute if the calculated load of the
anode is higher than the second entry of the cooling data of the
anode in the service program.
Example: calculated value is higher than 212kWs

054 Not used


055 Temperature Error The internal temperature of the generator has reached its limit.
Switch the generator off and let it cool down prior to further use.
056 Dose rate too high The dose rate applied to the patient is too high. Change the
generator settings to reduce the dose rate. This feature is only
available using the VacuDAPduo option.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-13
Error Error text Description
057- Not used.
060
061 Receiver overrun The receipt memory has been exceeded (the transferred data set
was too large or the data not fast enough finished).
062 transmitter overrun The transmission memory has been overwritten (internal error,
software problem).
063 communication controller Internal serial communication problems.

064 CAN-System The internal CAN bus communication is temporarily faulty. The
CAN bus controller tries to repeat the disturbed messages or
commands. If there are too many transmission errors this error
message will be set.
Possible causes:
- bad cable connection between the CAN bus
devices. Check all internal RJ45 cables and the
data cable to desk.
- CAN bus termination to low. Check the termination
resistors of the CAN bus devices BE26, BA6, BA7,
HSS1, IFF1. The CAN bus needs a termination
only on two devices. Normally on the ZST2 board
(X42 closed) and the BE26 (X17 closed).

065 BUS-System CAN bus controller is faulty. Hardware defect.


067 SCB Communication timeout Timeout of the Storz-Bus-System. Only used with Fluoroscopy
systems using Storz SCB bus.
If error appears on a RAD system check the activation of the SCB
Bus in the control desk settings. This functionality must be enabled
if the generator is connected to the SCB Bus. See control panel
settings in the service software or in the service mode of the
control panel to check this function. (Chapter 6.3)
068 SCB wrong version Version check.
090 HSS2 fault General HSS2 Failure
091 HSS2 LVPS One of the HSS2 low voltage supply out of regulation/tolerance.
Check for correct input voltage setting(400/480V option)
092 HSS2 fast hardware limit Check HSS2 wiring to tube, Check tube settings, or tube failure, or
output short/heavy load HSS2 failure
093 HSS2 over current Check HSS2 wiring to tube, Check tube settings, or tube failure, or
HSS2 failure
094 HSS2 phase under current Check tube settings, or tube failure, or loos stator wire
095 HSS2 DC bus under voltage Check input voltage setting, or HSS2 input power connector
096 HSS2 excessive run timeout Check HSS2 setup settings, or HSS2 has output drive when it
should be off
097 HSS2 configuration error Check HSS2 setup settings

Table 4-1: Error handling

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 5-14
6 Anatomic Programmed Radiography
6.1 Anatomic Programmed Radiography (APR)
It is possible to change the programmed parameters of the APR in 3 different ways.
1. Change the parameters via the control panel.
2. Change the organ text, region dimension and the parameters via the setup software
3. Import/Export a separate text file with the organ texts and parameters

6.2 Change the parameters via control panel


Choose an organ in the APR.
Change the displayed parameters and press the button M.

6.3 Change the parameters via the service program


The current APR data appear after the transfer procedure „Read SVC data from gen.“ has been completed.
Choose menu -> settings -> organ program…

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-2
6.3.1 Organ program x
Selection from 1 of 100 anatomic programs. „x“ = the number of the selected organ program. Organ program
0 is a special case (free technique). The text can be changed in the text field and changing the text or data
has to be confirmed by “Accept”.

6.3.2 Device (0-6):


Determining one of 6 devices (1 to 6) and the on-table (0).

6.3.3 Focus (1,2):


Selecting the small (1) or large (2) focal spot.

6.3.4 Exposure mode:


The exposure mode (1(falling load)-, 2- or 3-point mode).

6.3.5 Exposure kV (40-150):


Exposure kV.
This input is limited to a range of 40 to 150 kV.

6.3.6 Exposure mAs (0.5-600):


Exposure mAs.
This input is limited to a range of 0.5 to 600 mAs.

6.3.7 Exposure mAs (10-800):


Exposure mA.
This input is limited to a range of 10 to 800 mA.

6.3.8 Exposure ms (1-6300):


Exposure time in ms.
This input is limited to a range of 1 to 6300 ms.

6.3.9 AEC fields (L,C,R):


Selecting 1-7 field combinations („no“ = automatic exposure control off).

6.3.10 AEC screen (1-3):


Selecting one of 3 film-foil systems.

6.3.11 AEC gray level (+/-4):


Increasing or reducing gray level ( AEC points).
This input is limited to a range of -4 to +4.

6.3.12 FFD cm (50-400):


Film-focus distance.
This input is limited to a range of 50 to 400 cm.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-3
6.3.13 Object cm (1-99):
The patient body thickness at the point to be radiographed
This input is limited to a range of 1 to 99 cm.

6.3.14 Colli pos. (0-200):


Screen position.
This input is limited to a range of 0 to 200.

6.3.15 Reduced Power


If this is selected, the reduced tube power mode is used.

6.3.16 Cut
Copying the APR data + text of the recently selected organ to the cache and deleting this data set (the
remaining APR data sets are set forward by one position).

6.3.17 Copy
Copying the APR data + text of the recently selected organ to the cache

6.3.18 Paste
Copying the APR data from the cache to the momentary position (the remaining APR data sets are set back
by one position).

6.3.19 Accept
The changes have to be confirmed by this function. Otherwise, the settings made are lost if another APR
data set is selected.

6.3.20 Region x
Selecting one of 16 body regions. „x“ = the number of selected region. This text can be changed in the text
field and changes of texts or data has to be confirmed by “Accept”.

6.3.21 Region start:


The first APR data set of a region.

6.3.22 Region end:


The last organ program of a region.

6.3.23 Region body table:


Selecting one of 5 tables that control parameter changes (kV and mAs) used for body adjustment (+-cm).
(see Table )

6.3.24 Accept
The changes have to be confirmed by this function. Otherwise, the settings made are lost if another region is
selected.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-4
Compensation of KV and mAs besed of change organ thickness as function of cm

Table 1 Table 2
cm kV increment mAs-increment cm kV increment mAs increment

+10 +1 +10 +1
+9 +1 +9 +1
+8 +1 +8 +1
+7 +1 +7 +1
+6 +1 +6 +1
+5 +1 +5 +1
+4 +1 +4 +1
+3 +1 +3 +1
+2 +1 +2 +1
+1 +1 +1 +1
0 0
-1 -1 -1 -1
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3 -1 -3 -1
-4 -1 -4 -1
-5 -1 -5 -1
-6 -1 -6 -1
-7 -1 -7 -1
-8 -1 -8 -1
-9 -1 -9 -1
-10 -1 -10 -1

Table 3 Table 4
cm kV increment mAs increment cm kV increment mAs increment

+10 +1 +10 +1
+9 +1 +9 +1
+8 +1 +8 +1
+7 +1 +7 +1
+6 +1 +6 +1
+5 +1 +5 +1
+4 +1 +4 +1
+3 +1 +3 +1
+2 +1 +2 +1
+1 +1 +1 +1
0 0
-1 -1 -1 -1
-2 -1 -2 -1
-3 -1 -3 -1
-4 -1 -4 -1
-5 -1 -5 -1
-6 -1 -6 -1
-7 -1 -7 -1
-8 -1 -8 -1
-9 -1 -9 -1
-10 -1 -10 -1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-5
Table 5
cm kV increment mAs increment

cm kV mAs
+10 +1
+9 +0,5
+8 +0,5
+7 +0,5
+6 +0,5
+5 +1
+4 +0,5
+3 +0,5
+2 +0,5
+1 +0,5
0
-1 -0,5
-2 -0,5
-3 -0,5
-4 -0,5
-5 -1
-6 -0,5
-7 -0,5
-8 -0,5
-9 -0,5
-10 -1

Table 5-1: Body adjustment tables.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-6
6.4 Use separate APR text file
It is possible to export an APR data set to a separate file using the service software.
Menu -> export organ text+data
Or you can import a separate APR data set via the service software.
Menu -> import organ text+data
After you import an APR data set you must transfer the data to the generator
Menu -> transfer -> transfer svc data to gen
and transfer the APR texts to the control panel.
Menu -> transfer -> transfer svc data to gen

A list of an English APR text file is shown at the end of this chapter.
Example organ nr. 7:
:#007 Foot lateral:EXP 0,1,2,55,8.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 07

6.4.1 Declaration

“#007” Number of the organ. This number is shown in the first display line.
“Organ name“ (Foot lateral) maximum 34 characters

device focus technique kV mAs mA ms


:EXP 0 (over table) 1 (small) 1 (1-point) 40 1.0 10 10
1 (Bucky) 2 (large) 2 (2- point) 41 1.6 16 16
2 (Wall stand) 3 (3- point) ... ... ... ...
.

dominant film-foil systems


:AEC 0 (without AEC) 1 (foil 1 (400))
1 (left) 2 (foil 2 (800))
2 (center) 3 (foil 3 (200))
3 (left, center) 4 (foil 4)
4 (right) 5 (foil 5)
5 (left, right)
6 (left, center)
7 (left, center, right)

thickness
:OBJ 01
02
...

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-7
6.4.2 Example of an APR text file

:#000 Worm up:EXP 0,2,3,70,63,50,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 20


:#001 Ankle a.p.:EXP 0,1,2,55,10,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 08
:#002 Ankle lateral:EXP 0,1,2,53,10,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 07
:#003 Hell bone axial:EXP 0,1,2,55,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#004 Heel bone lateral:EXP 0,1,2,52,8.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 07
:#005 Metatarsus d.pl.:EXP 0,1,2,50,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#006 Metatarsus oblique:EXP 0,1,2,50,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#007 Foot lateral:EXP 0,1,2,55,8.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 07
:#008 Forefoot:EXP 0,1,2,48,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 05
:#009 Toes a.p./oblique:EXP 0,1,2,46,5.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 03
:#010 Skull survey p.a./a.p.:EXP 2,1,1,77,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 18
:#011 Skull oblique:EXP 2,1,1,73,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 16
:#012 Skull axial:EXP 2,1,1,85,32,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 22
:#013 Os petrosa sagittal:EXP 2,1,1,77,20,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 17
:#014 Os petrosa Stenvers:EXP 2,1,1,77,20,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 17
:#015 Optical foramen Rhese:EXP 2,1,1,73,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 17
:#016 Sinuses p.a.:EXP 2,1,1,77,40,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 22
:#017 Nasal bone lateral:EXP 0,1,2,44,1.6,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 04
:#018 Mandible lateral:EXP 0,1,2,63,10,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 11
:#019 #19
:#020 Cervical vertebrae 1-4 ap Dens:EXP 2,2,3,66,13,10,3200:AEC 2,1:OBJ 13
:#021 Cervical vertebrae 4-7 a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,70,4.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 13
:#022 Cervical spine lateral:EXP 2,2,1,73,4.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 13
:#023 Cervical spine oblique:EXP 2,2,1,73,4.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 13
:#024 Thoracic spine a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,77,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 21
:#025 Thoracic spine lateral:EXP 2,2,1,81,50,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#026 Thoracic spine oblique:EXP 1,2,3,81,50,16,3200:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#027 Oesophagus oblique:EXP 2,2,1,90,4.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 28
:#028 #28
:#029 #29
:#030 Shoulder joint a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,66,25,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 11
:#031 Shoulder joint axial:EXP 2,2,1,66,13,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 11
:#032 Scapula p.a.:EXP 2,2,1,68,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 14
:#033 Scapula lateral:EXP 2,2,1,73,25,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 17
:#034 Shoulder transthorakal:EXP 2,2,1,90,80,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#035 Shoulder no shutter:EXP 0,2,2,66,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 09
:#036 clavicle tangential:EXP 2,2,1,66,13,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 11
:#037 #37
:#038 #38
:#039 #39

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-8
:#040 1.-7. Rib p.a.:EXP 2,2,1,70,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 21
:#041 8.-12. Rib p.a.:EXP 2,2,1,73,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 21
:#042 Sternum p.a.:EXP 2,2,3,77,16,10,3200:AEC 2,1:OBJ 21
:#043 Sternum lateral:EXP 2,2,1,85,40,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#044 Sternum lat. no shutter:EXP 0,2,2,85,20,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 30
:#045 Lungs p.a.:EXP 2,1,1,125,2.5,100,100:AEC 5,1:OBJ 21
:#046 Lungs lateral:EXP 2,1,1,125,6.2,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#047 Lungs a.p. with gridcassette:EXP 0,1,2,125,2.5,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 21
:#048 Lungs a.p. bed:EXP 0,1,2,85,3.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 21
:#049 Lungs lateral (child up to 7):EXP 0,1,2,70,1.6,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 15
:#050 Upper arm a.p.:EXP 0,1,2,66,5.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 08
:#051 Elbow v.d.:EXP 0,1,2,55,5.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#052 Elbow lateral:EXP 0,1,2,55,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 08
:#053 Forearm v.d.:EXP 0,1,2,52,3.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 04
:#054 Forearm latral:EXP 0,1,2,52,4.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 07
:#055 #55
:#056 #56
:#057 Constance 70kV bucky tab. auto:EXP 1,2,1,70,32,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 20
:#058 Constance 70kV bucky tab. man.:EXP 1,2,2,70,32,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 20
:#059 Constance 100kV wall stand aut:EXP 2,1,1,100,5.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 20
:#060 Lumbar vertebrae 1-4 a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,77,25,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 20
:#061 Lumbar vertebrae 1-4 lateral:EXP 2,2,1,90,80,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#062 Lumbar vertebrae 1-4 oblique:EXP 2,2,1,81,40,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 22
:#063 Childs lumbar vertebrae a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,72,16,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 15
:#064 Childs lumbar vertebrae lat.:EXP 2,2,1,80,50,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 26
:#065 Spine panorama:EXP 0,2,2,77,160,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 20
:#066 Spine function:EXP 0,2,2,77,160,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 20
:#067 Abdomen survey horizontal:EXP 1,2,1,85,13,100,100:AEC 5,1:OBJ 22
:#068 Abdomen survey vertical:EXP 2,2,1,87,13,100,100:AEC 5,1:OBJ 25
:#069 Abdomen survey lat. position:EXP 1,2,1,90,25,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 30
:#070 Wrist d.v.:EXP 0,1,2,48,8.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 04
:#071 Wrist lateral:EXP 0,1,2,48,10,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#072 Wrist d.v. plaster:EXP 0,1,2,52,13,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 04
:#073 Wrist lateral plaster:EXP 0,1,2,52,16,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 06
:#074 Hand d.v.:EXP 0,1,2,46,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 03
:#075 Hand lateral/oblique:EXP 0,1,2,48,8.0,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 05
:#076 Finger lateral/oblique:EXP 0,1,2,46,6.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 02
:#077 Finger baby:EXP 0,1,2,43,3.2,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 01
:#078 #078
:#079 #079
:#080 Hip a.p., axial:EXP 1,2,1,77,40,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 22
:#081 Pelvis:EXP 2,2,1,77,32,100,100:AEC 5,1:OBJ 20

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-9
:#082 Sacrum, coccyx a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,77,25,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 19
:#083 Sacrum, coccyx lateral:EXP 2,2,1,90,50,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 33
:#084 Urinary bladder a.p.:EXP 2,2,1,81,8.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 19
:#085 Urinary bladder axial:EXP 2,2,1,85,13,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 21
:#086 #086
:#087 #087
:#088 #088
:#089 #089
:#090 Femur upper ap:EXP 2,2,1,73,13,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 13
:#091 Femur lower se:EXP 2,2,1,73,10,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 12
:#092 Knee a.p.::EXP 2,2,1,66,10,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 12
:#093 Knee lateral:EXP 2,2,1,66,8.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 10
:#094 Knee-joint:EXP 2,2,1,63,10,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 12
:#095 Patella p.a.:EXP 2,2,1,65,8.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 12
:#096 Patella axial:EXP 2,2,1,63,8.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 07
:#097 Lower leg a.p.:EXP 1,2,1,57,4.0,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 11
:#098 Lower leg lateral:EXP 1,2,1,57,3.2,100,100:AEC 2,1:OBJ 09
:#099 Leg panorama:EXP 0,2,2,77,63,100,100:AEC 0,1:OBJ 20

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 6-10
7 Control Panel

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-2
7.1 Overview

Figure 6-1: Standard Control Panel

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-3
Figure 6-2: Fluoroscopy Control Panel

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-4
Pow2 Pow1

Figure 6-3: FLXIS Control Panel


27 43
31 30 29 48 13
27 26 25 42 44
40 22 21 49 16 28 36
19 18 17

EDITOR HFe
04 35
32 39 23 11 10 09 46 47
14 07 05 12 34

Service Manual X-Ray Generator


24 38 37 03 02 01 45
15 06 08 20 33 XRAY
key 4

205 203 201 240 241 220 221 231 232 233 210 211 212

206 204 202 242 243 222 223 235 234 236 251 230 250

XRAY

page 7-5
key 1,3

HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


7.2 Function of the buttons
For additional information about the Control Panel functionality of the buttons refer to the user manual.

PB No Designation / Function
Push-button 001 Store push-button for the anatomic program
Push-button 002 Selection of the organ group 0 or numeric key 0
Push-button 003 Information query
Push-button with
004 Select right measuring field
LED
Push-button with
005 Select Film foil system
LED
Push-button 006 Select exposure mode (R1, R2, R3)
Push-button 007 New patient
Push-button with
008 Select Film foil system
LED
Push-button 009 Selection of the organ group 3 or numeric key 3
Push-button 010 Selection of the organ group 2 or numeric key 2
Push-button 011 Selection of the organ group 1 or numeric key 1
Push-button with
012 Select centered measuring field
LED
Push-button 013 Correction, higher density
Push-button with
014 Select small focal spot
LED
Push-button with
015 Select large focal spot
LED
Push-button 016 Correction, lower density
Push-button 017 Selection of the organ group 6 or numeric key 6
Push-button 018 Selection of the organ group 5 or numeric key 5
Push-button 019 Selection of the organ group 4 or numeric key 4
Push-button with
020 Select left measuring field (disabled)
LED
Push-button 021 Select mA for radiography, lower values
Push-button 022 Select mAs for radiography, lower values
Push-button with
023 mode 3 / x-ray device 3, radiography/fluoroscopy(enabled)
LED
Push-button with
024 mode 4 / x-ray device 4, (disabled)
LED
Push-button 025 Selection of the organ group 9 or numeric key 9
Push-button 026 Selection of the organ group 8 or numeric key 8
Push-button 027 Selection of the organ group 7 or numeric key 7
Push-button with
028 Error signalization and confirmation
LED
Push-button 029 Select mA for radiography, higher values
Push-button 030 Select mAs for radiography, higher values
Push-button 031 Select kV for radiography, higher values
Push-button with
032 mode 1 / x-ray device 1, only fluoroscopy (enabled)
LED
Push-button 033 Function button 4

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-6
PB No Designation / Function
Push-button 034 Function button 3
Push-button 035 Function button 2
Push-button 036 Function button 1
Push-button with
037 mode 6 / x-ray device 6
LED
Push-button with
038 mode 5 / x-ray device 5
LED
Push-button with
039 mode 2 / x-ray device 2, analog radiography
LED
Push-button 040 Select kV for radiography, lower values
Push-button 041 Select kV for fluoroscopy, higher values
Push-button 042 Select kV for fluoroscopy, lower values
Push-button 043 Select mA for fluoroscopy, higher values
Push-button 044 Select mA for fluoroscopy, lower values
Push-button with
045 Reset timer, LED shows timer overrun
LED
Push-button with
046 Select ABC
LED
Push-button with
047 Select fluoroscopy mode, (F1, F2, F3)
LED
Push-button 048 Select ms for radiography, higher values
Push-button 049 Select ms for radiography, lower values
Push-button with
Pow1 ON for part of the equipment, LED is on in standby
LED
Push-button Pow2 OFF for part of the equipment, not powerless
Push-button XRAY key 1 X-ray Preparation ON, first step
Push-button XRAY key 3 X-ray Exposure ON, second step
Push-button XRAY key 4 X-ray Fluoroscopy ON
Push-button Open hor. collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
201
usermanual)
Push-button Close hor. collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
202
usermanual)
Push-button Open ver. collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
203
usermanual)
Push-button Close ver. collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
204
usermanual)
Push-button Open Iris collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
205
usermanual)
Push-button Close Iris collimator, (special function with F1, F2 (see
206
usermanual)
Push-button with
210 Select Zoom 0
LED
Push-button with
211 Select Zoom 1
LED
Push-button with
212 Select Zoom 2
LED
Push-button with
220 Select continuous fluoroscopy mode
LED
Push-button with
221 Select pulsed fluoroscopy mode 16 P/s
LED

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-7
PB No Designation / Function
Push-button with
222 Select pulsed fluoroscopy mode 4 P/s
LED
Push-button with
223 Select pulsed fluoroscopy mode 2 P/s
LED
Push-button with
230 Save image
LED
Push-button with
231 Mirror image horizontal
LED
Push-button with
232 Mirror image vertical
LED
Push-button with
233 Edge enhancement
LED
Push-button with
234 Rotate Image 90° clockwise
LED
Push-button with
235 Rotate Image 90° anticlockwise
LED
Push-button with
236 Reset image rotation and mirroring
LED
Push-button with
240 Reclusive filter 1
LED
Push-button with
241 Reclusive filter 2
LED
Push-button with
242 Reclusive filter 4
LED
Push-button with
243 Reclusive filter 8 (not used with FLXIS
LED
Push-button with
236 Shows Previous stored image
LED
Push-button with
240 Shows next stored image
LED

Table 6-1: Overview of the functions of the pushbuttons

7.3 Service program of the control panel


The control panel can be started in a service mode for function
The dongle must be connected instead of the hand switch. The generator must be started without pressing
any key. The Generator starts in his own setup mode if a key is pressed during start.
1. key test
The pressed key number is shown on the display
Service mode key test
Desk V X.XXrX
2. all LED’s on
All LED are on together except for the standby LED in the ON button
Test all LED´s on

3. LED goes around


Each LED goes on for a short time except for the standby LED in the ON button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-8
Test all LED´s turns around

4. Second display line test


Display test: All pixel on Line 2

5. First display line test

Display test: All pixel on Line 1


6. Display test character
The connection to the display is ok when the string “!0248Qü” is displayed.
Display test: !0248Qü

7. Buzzer test
The buzzer goes on for 1s.
Buzzer test: one second

8. Display settings 1
- Brightness LED: 20 – 100 default 60
- Brightness display: 20 – 100 default 100
- Baud rate COM1: 06 – 14 default 7 (9600) (external COM port)

0 = disable
4 = 1200
5 = 2400
6 = 4800
7 = 9600
8 = 19200
9 = 38400
10 = 57600
11 = 76800
12 = 100000
13 = 115200
14 = 125000

- SCB enable: 0–1 default 1


Dim LED Dim display baud SCB
60 100 7 0
9. Display settings 2
- Fluoro desk = 0 (standard fluoroscopy control desk design)
- Fluoro desk = 1 (special fluoroscopy control panel design with TV-chain control buttons)
- IF31 = 0 (disable RS323 port to IF31 interface and TV-chain button)
- IF31 = 1 (enable RS323 port to IF31 interface and TV-chain button)
Fluoro desk IF31
0 0
10. Save control panel settings

To save press M

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-9
Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6
Key 7

Key 8

Key 14 Key 9

Key 13 Key 17

Key 15 Key 18

Key 16 Key 10

Key 19 Key 11

Key 20 Key 23

Key 21 Key 24

Key 22 Key 12
Figure 6-4: Touch Panel

Key no. Function


1 Tube voltage decrease
2 Tube voltage increase
3 Decreasing the tube current / mAs-product
4 Increasing the tube current / mAs-product
5 Decreasing the circuit time
6 Increasing the circuit time
7 Selection operating mode
8 Selection focal
9 Exposure technique selection
10 Upwards scrolling APR group name
11 Downwards scrolling APR group name
12 Memory key
13 Confirmation key
14 Display information
15 Selection APR group
16 Selection APR name (max. 100 organ name)
17 Scrolling thickness - 1cm
18 Scrolling thickness + 1cm
19 Select left measuring field
20 Select centre measuring field
21 Select right measuring field
22 Scroll film-screen-system
23 Decreasing the density by 1 exposure point
24 Increasing the density by 1 exposure point

Table 6-2: Overview of the functions of the keys


Further descriptions how to use the touch panel are included in the user manual.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 7-10
8 Printed circuit boards and
modules
8.1 Filament heating board HZG1

Figure 7-1: HZG1 print screen

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-2
8.1.1 Jumper HZG1
no. Pins signal default setting Description
X3 2 closed Over current detection (Filament current +1A):
Opened: deactivated (only for internal use!)
Closed: active

8.1.2 Potentiometer HZG1


no. signal default setting Description
R39 FILIST Set in factory Adjustment of the filament current measuring circuit. Don’t move
this potentiometer!

8.1.3 LEDs indication HZG1


No. Color Signal Function Description
V1 Green ENA HZG1 is enabled ON when HZG1 is enabled.
OFF when generator in error state
V7 red Error Ih_max Error LED over current Indicator for over current
Filament current was high than 8,5A or
if the different of set value and actual
value is more than 1 A
V27 Yellow Offset Indicate an offset Offset between set value and actual
value of the filament current.
V36 Green K3_OK Indicate a switched relay K3 Control LED for the relay K3. The relay
K3 switched on after ca 1s when the
capacitors of the intermediate circuit are
charged. The inverter circuit stops If the
relay is not switching.
V33 Red Error Offset Error LED offset If the time of the offset between set
value and actual value is longer than
500ms
V46 Green +12V Indication +12V Internal supply voltage +12V
V44 Red UZK+ Indicate charged capacitors The LED is on if the capacitors of the
intermediate circuit are charged and
during the time of discharging when the
system is switched off or the filament
board is in error state.

8.1.4 Test points HZG1


No. Signal Description
TP1 +12V Internal +12V DC
TP3 -12V Internal -12V DC
TP4 GND Internal Ground
TP7 FILSOLL Set value of filament current (1V = 1A)
TP8 FILIST Actual measured value of the filament current (1V = 1A)
TP10 FIL_ENA Enable signal of the filament board.
TP1’ (UZK) UZK Intermediate circuit voltage. (80V DC)
TP5’ +15V/INV Supply voltage for the driver of the inverter
TP3’ GND/INV Internal ground from UZK and +15V/INV

8.1.5 Fuses HZG1


No. Value Description
F1 3,15A time lag Fuse for the power section of the HZG1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-3
8.2 Interface and starter board NAG2

Figure 7-2: NAG2 print screen

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-4
8.2.1 Connector NAG2
No. Pins Function Description
X7 20 Interface to ZST2 Flat cable connection to the ZST2
Internal Interface signals
X11 15 Interface to external 15 pol DSUB plug socket connector
digital image systems Pin Signal description
1 +24V/IF (max 80mA), External Interface voltage
2/4 Output: Bucky start signal
Low active when Jumper JP4 closed and JP3 opened
High active when Jumper JP4 opened and JP3 closed
Active when exposure button is pressed, the preparation is
ready and the tube anode is rotating.
Generator is ready for exposure
4/5 Input: Bucky1
This signal starts an exposure when the generator is ready
for exposure
6 Output: Preparation
Synchronization signal to preparation if JP5 in position 1-2
7/8 Output: STR_SYNC
Synchronization signal to X-ray
9 / 12 Output: BUCKY1_SEKECT
Active if device1 is selected
10 / 13 Output: BUCKY2_SEKECT
Active if device2 is selected
11 / 14 Output: BUCKY3_SEKECT
Active if device3 is selected
15 GND/IF, Ground of the external 24V/IF

X8 4 Tube 70°C thermo 4 pol Comibicon connector


contact
Internal connection of the thermo contacts from tube 1 and 2.
Pin Signal description
Connected to the tube 1 Input thermo contact of tube 1
stator connector X6 on 2/3 GND/IF
the sub distribution 4 Input thermo contact of tube 1
X10 4 Door contact 4 pol Comibicon connector
Internal connection of the door contacts from room 1 and 2.
Pin Signal description
Connected to the door
stator connector X8 on 1 Input door contact of room1
the sub distribution 2/3 GND/IF
4 Input door contact of room 2
X13 2 +24V/IF Interface voltage for the connection of mechanical bucky devices.
X9 3 Interface voltage for Input of external interface voltage for the mechanical bucky device 1
Bucky devices 1 and 2 and 2.
X20 2 Preparation for bucky Output of the preparation signal for the mechanical bucky device 1 and
device 1 and 2 2.
X3 / X4 5 Bucky device 1 and 2 Interface to mechanical bucky device 1 and 2.

8.2.2 Jumper NAG2


No. Pins Signal Default setting Description
JP1 2 opened Opened: DC interface voltage bucky 1 and 2
Closed: AC interface voltage bucky 1 and 2
JP3 2 Closed High Low active setting of output signal bucky_start

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-5
No. Pins Signal Default setting Description
JP4 2 Opened JP3 Opened / JP4 closed high active
JP4 Opened / JP3 closed low active
JP5 2 Closed Additional pre resistor for the external interface voltage.
JP6 3 1–2 Signal setting for output X11 pin 6
1 – 2: preparation signal
2 – 3: Exon_Delay signal (not in use)

8.2.3 LED indication NAG2


No. Color Signal Function Description
V13 Green +24V/IF Indicator 24V/IF External interface voltage
V28 Green STR_DEV Indicator for X-ray on On during x-ray or when inverter is
active
V41 Yellow Bucky_start Indication when bucky start signal On: generator is ready for exposure
is active
V22 Green Tube2 Indication when tube 2 is On: Tube 2 is selected, in this case
selected input thermo contact 2 and input door
contact 2 is active.
V3 Green Tube Starter is active The tube starter is only switched on
when the preparation button is active.
V43-49 Green Device LEDs V48 – Bucky device 1 selected
V47 – Bucky device 2 selected
V46 – Bucky device 3 selected
V45 – Bucky device 4 selected

V43, V44, V49 not in use


V40 Green Bucky1 Indication of input signal bucky1 X-ray starts signal from bucky device 1
and 2.
V5 Yellow /BREMS Tube anode braking This LED indicates a breaking of the
anode rotation. The rotation of the
anode will starts 15s after exposure.
The braking time is set to minimum
(100ms) with a deactivated brake.
V6 Yellow /ANLAUF Tube anode start This LED indicates the starting of the
anode rotation. This LED goes on
during the first 1,5 second when the
preparation is active

8.2.4 Test points NAG2


No. Signal Description
TP GNDA Internal ground
TP1 +12V +12V DC internal supply voltage
TP2 +24V/IF +24V DC interface voltage, maximal 80mA
TP3 GND/IF Ground of the interface voltage

8.2.5 Fuses NAG2


No. Value Description
F1 1A time lag Fuse for the external warning light 230V
F2 6,3A time lag Fuse for the tube starter
F3 315mA time lag Fuse for DC/DC converter
F5 50mA time lag Fuse for mechanical bucky device input

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-6
8.3 Central controller board ZST2

Figure 7-3: ZST2 print screen

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-7
8.3.1 Jumper ZST2
No. Pins Signal Default setting Description
X9 2 kV max closed Over voltage detection kV:
Opened: kV max = 133kV
Closed: kV max = 166kV
X45 2 Ilmax Opened Over current detection IL:
Opened: IL max = 300A
Closed: IL max = 250A
X60 3 NOT 2-3 NOT delay time:
Position 1-2: 200ms (only for LIH function)
Position 2-3: no delay
X51 2 7s delay closed Backup timer “Exposure time overrun”:
Opened: 7s backup time
Closed: 11s backup time
X46 3 7s delay opened Backup timer “Exposure time overrun”:
Opened: default backup time, see X51
Closed: 0,1s backup time (only for test)
X42 2 CAN Closed Termination of CAN BUS:
Opened: no termination (for RS232)
Closed: Termination of CAN bus 60Ohm complete
X43 3 T_2 2-3 Selection internal CAN BUS or RS232
Position 1-2: TxD_1 (RS232)
Position 2-3: CAN_L (CAN-BUS)
X44 3 R_2 2-3 Selection internal CAN BUS or RS232
Position 1-2: RxD_1 (RS232)
Position 2-3: CAN_H (CAN-BUS)
X50 2 Closed Pulsed exposure mode via board NAG2
Opened: no pulsed exposure, only Bucky1 and 2
Closed: pulsed exposure via signal XPULS
X12 3 STR_DEV 1-2 Selection for external X-ray on Signal (STR_DEV)
Position 1-2: STR_DEV = START_DEV
(synchronal with converter start)
Position 2-3: STR_DEV = HOC
(synchronal kV higher 18kV)
X47 2 LOA6 Opened Activation of signal LOA6, used for AEC option
Opened: Signal LOA6 active
Closed: Signal LOA6 not active
X54 – X58 2 Opened Activation of external SPI BUS
(not in use)
X52 3 2-3 DAP settings (see chapter 2.4.11 & 2.4.12)
X59 3 1-2 DAP settings (see chapter 2.4.11 & 2.4.12)
X61 2 Closed DAP settings (see chapter 2.4.11 & 2.4.12)
X62 2 Closed DAP settings (see chapter 2.4.11 & 2.4.12)
X12 1-2 Start_dev 1-2 24V signal for external device.
Output at exposure start

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-8
No. Pins Signal Default setting Description
2-3 HOC 24V signal for external device.
Output at kV > 18kV
X1 2 NOT-loop Closed Close security loop, if no AEC is installed
X15 3 NOT-loop 1-2 Enable external security loop, for Fluoro interface (Fluoro 2-3)
X8 2 NOT-loop closed Close security loop

8.3.2 Switch ZST2


No. Positions Signal default setting Description
S1 2 SVC 1-2 upper Switch for test mode:
position
1-2 Upper position: normal mode
2-3 lower position: Test mode, for service.
Exposure time max 20ms

8.3.3 Potentiometer ZST2


no. signal Default setting Description
R51 Middle position Regulation of the kV rise rate
(2,5V) Clockwise: increase kV rise time
Anti-clockwise: decrease kV rise time

8.3.4 LED indication ZST2


No. Color Signal Function Description
V4 Green +24V/E Indicator 24V/E Internal supply for relays.
V34 Green +12V/STDBY Indicator 12V Standby Internal supply voltage for power on
circuit. Indicates also mains switched
V44 Green +20VP Indicator +20V desk Internal power supply for control desk
V43 Green +16V Indicator +16V DAP Internal power supply for area dose
product option
V52 Yellow /ANLAUFOK Indicator for tube anode start Shows actual current flow in the Main
phase (W) and Shift phase (U) of the
tube stator. Normally on during the first
1,5s of preparation.
V62 Green NOT Indicator for a closed safety loop. X-ray only possible with a closed loop.
The loop is normally closed when the
exposure hand switch is pressed.
V1 Red ERR\ Error indication On during error. See error message on
display
Shows also the last detected error code
during switching on.
0
V60 Red ERR1 Error BIT 0 (Value 2 =1) Error LEDs. This LEDs show the first 16
1 errors of the generator in binary format.
V61 Red ERR2 Error BIT 1 (Value 2 =2) See message on display
2
V59 Red ERR3 Error BIT 2 (Value 2 =4)
3
V58 Red ERR4 Error BIT 3 (Value 2 =8)
V40 Green +5V Indicator +5V Internal power supply for the digital
circuits
V41 Green +15V Indicator +15V Internal power supply for the analogue
circuits
V8 Green -15V Indicator -15V Internal power supply for the analogue
circuits
V70 Red /SVC Indicator for test mode Shows an activated test mode. This
mode is only for trouble shooting.
Exposure time limitation 20ms max.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-9
8.3.5 Test points ZST2
No. Signal Description
X24 +UR Actual value of Tube kV Anode side (1V=40kV)
X25 -UR Actual value of Tube kV cathode side (1V=40kV)
X34 URIST2 Actual value of the resulting Tube kV (1V=40kV)
X2 URIST The same like X34 but only for factory use
X35 +IR’ Actual value of Tube current Anode side
(1V=200mA by tube current 20mA – 800mA)
(1V=10mA by tube current lower or equal than 20mA)
X19 +IR The same like X35 but only for factory use
X36 -IR’ Actual value of Tube current Cathode side
(1V=200mA by tube current 20mA – 800mA)
(1V=10mA by tube current lower or equal than 20mA)
X20 -IR The same like X36 but only for factory use
X41 IR2 Actual value of the resulting Tube current
(1V=200mA by tube current 20mA – 800mA)
(1V=10mA by tube current lower or equal than 20mA)
X23 IR The same like X41 but only for factory use
X37 IL Actual value of the internal converter current during X-ray
X39 X27 GND/D Digital ground
X40 GND/A Analog ground
X11 /EXP_ENA Backup timer. Enforced stop of X-ray
X16 +16V + 16V DC
X4 +5V +5V DC
X38 +15V/I +15V DC
X14 -15V/I -15V DC
X3 +24/E +24V DC (unregulated 24V, +/-4V), X21 Ground
X32 +20VP +24V DC (unregulated 24V, +/-4V),
X22 +12V/STDBY +12V DC (unregulated 24V, +/-4V), X28 Ground
X29 /PWMTS1 Frequency of the step down converter
X31 /INVFRQB Inverter frequency during X-ray
X32 /INVFRQA Inverter frequency during X-ray
X26 /STR2 Synchronal signal with start of the inverter. Useful for service

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-10
8.3.6 ZST2 Battery replacement procedure:
1. Remove battery from battery housing.
- First pull up the retaining
spring of the battery
holder

- Than push the battery out


of the battery holder
- Here we use a small
screwdriver

- Use two fingers to take the


battery out

- Please depollute the old


battery into the scheduled
hazardous waste

- Set in a new battery

2. Insert new battery by pushing it in with slight force.(Positive polarity on top) ). See replacement parts
for more information about the used battery
3. Dispose battery according to local code
4. Set clock time according to procedure chapter 3.2.3 Setup of the internal time
Note: When battery is replaced the X-Ray tube KHU calculated value is lost. If tube is hot wait until it cools
before starting to take exposures.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-11
8.4 Inverter driver board ANS2

Figure 7-4: ANS2 print screen

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-12
8.4.1 Connectors ANS2
No. Pins Function Description
X1 2 Gate IGBT V3 Connection to the gate of the step down converter IGBT V3
X2 2 Gate IGBT V1.2 Connection to the gate of double IGBT V1.2
X3 2 Gate IGBT V2.2 Connection to the gate of double IGBT V2.2
X4 2 Gate IGBT V1.1 Connection to the gate of double IGBT V1.1
X5 2 Gate IGBT V2.1 Connection to the gate of double IGBT V2.1
X8 4 Connection to the current measuring transformer T1
X9 5 Connection to the power switching on relays K1 K2
X10 2 230V input power supply
X6 15 Interface connection to the central controller board ZST2

8.4.2 LED indication ANS2


No. Color Signal Function Description
V14 Yellow /S10 Power conductor K2 is on The closed contacts of conductor K2
charge the capacitors of intermediate
circuit inside of the converter cabinet for
5s after switching on.
V15 Yellow /S20 Power conductor K1 is on The closed contacts of conductor K1
connect the converter to the mains after
5s when the capacitors are charged.
V5, Green +15V Indicator of the 15V supply Each IGBT gate has a separate power
V25, voltage of each driver supply.
V29,
V34 LED are on when generator is on

V1, V2, Green Indication of an active Gate The IGBTs are driven during X-ray. Only
V8, V9, signal on during the exposure
V13

8.4.3 Test points ANS2


The test points on the driver board ANS2 are only for use in the factory. A measuring on these points is not
allowed because the signals are on high dangerous voltage level.

8.4.4 Fuses ANS2


No. Value Description
F1 500mA time lag Fuse for the two power conductors K1 and K2
F2 250mA time lag Fuse for the power supply of the gate driver
F3 250mA time lag Fuse for the power supply of the gate driver
F4 500mA time lag Fuse for the power supply of the gate driver

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-13
8.5 Inverter fans (fluoroscopy option only)

8.5.1 Cooling fans


Inside of the fluoroscopy inverter three fans are installed. They are placed on the bottom of the inverter
between the ANS2 board and the heat sink. The three fans are located partially below the heat sink, so that
they are able to push the air through the fins of the heat sink when they are switched on.

Figure 7-5: Fan assembly module

8.5.2 Functionality of the fans


The three fans are controlled by the ANS2 board. It is connected to the two thermo-switches. One of these
switches activates the fans without any further notice if the power unit heat sink reaches a temperature of
more than 50 degree Celsius. If the temperature on the heat sink decreases below 50 degree Celsius the
thermo-switch opens and the fans turn off. The second thermo-switch is activated at a temperature of more
than 80 degree Celsius. Upon reaching this level the generator stops operating and an error message is
displayed (see chapter 4 Error handling) keeping the fans running. The generator has to be cooled down
before next usage.

8.5.3 Attention
The fans push hot air through the ventilation grill on the top of the generator.
The three fans are fixed on a metal mesh. The diameter of the holes is only 5mm, so the fans are not
reachable by human body parts from outside the inverter. Only trained service personnel are allowed to open
the front door of the inverter by using tools to access the fans.

8.5.4 Connections

Part Connection
Thermo-switch (50°C) ANS2  X12
Thermo-switch (80°C) ANS2  X11
Fans (1 / 2 / 3) ANS2  X13 (PIN: 1,2 / 3,4 / 5,6)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 8-14
9 Maintenance and Service
9.1 Regular Maintenance/Repair
When a repair is performed that requires board /module to be replaced the HFe generator some
boards/modules requires retest calibration of the functions (Parameter/s) related to the replaced
components. If any test is out of spec recalibration is requires according to procedure in Chapter 3. See table
below for calibration parameters that need to checked, and calibrate if the parameters are out of spec/range.

Note: Before part/module replacement:


Shut down generator’s internal circuit breaker OFF, and external circuit breaker
Wait until hot parts are cool down.
Wait at least one minuet until H.V. is discharge.

9.1.1 Generator components replacement

Table below provides information about calibration needed to perform when specific board/device is
replaced. For additional information about jumpers setting on the boards refer to chapter 7 or chapter 9 for
options. Depending on replacement part that was replaced test described below may need to below may
need to be checked again. (Such as generator accuracy, reproducibility, or linearity)

Remove screw of the front cover and unscrew from the front the rear panel locks in order at access parts
inside the generator.

Board/Module Replaced Order Part Numbers Calibration Parameters to


Check/Calibrate
59000129 non
HZG1 - Filament heating board
(inactive focus) (only with
fluoroscopy option)
59000129 Tube calibration
HZG1 - Filament heating board
(active focus)
(see chapter 3.2.4)
59000299 Configuration:
NAG2 - Device interface / low
speed starter
- Jumper settings
(see chapter 7.2.2)
- Bucky interface voltage
(see chapter 9.1.2)
58002099 Configuration:
BA6 - Automatic exposure
control board
- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.4.1.4)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
- AEC calibration
(see chapter 9.4.2.4)
59000319 Configuration:
BA7 - Automatic exposure
control board
- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.5.1.4)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
- AEC calibration
(see chapter 9.5.2.3.1)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-2
Board/Module Replaced Order Part Numbers Calibration Parameters to
Check/Calibrate
59000079 Configuration:
ZST2 - Central controller board

- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.4.1.5)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
460319-001 Configuration:
IFC1 – Standard Interface Board

- Switch and Jumper settings


(see chapter 9.6.5 )
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
59000259 Configuration:
IFF1 - Fluoroscopy interface
(only with fluoroscopy option)
- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.2.2)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
59000339
UNI1 - Universal fluoroscopy Configuration:
connector adapter
(only with fluoroscopy option) - Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.2.3)
06000274 Configuration:
HSS1 - High speed starter

- Jumper an DIP switch settings


(see chapter 9.3.4.5)
- Stator voltage settings
(see chapter 9.3.4.7)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
406935-001 Configuration:
HSS2- High speed starter

- Jumper an DIP switch settings


(see chapter 9.5.3.3)
- Generator and Stator voltage
settings
(see chapter 9.8.5)
59000099 Non
BUS2 - Back plane board for
radiography
59000269 Non
BUS4 - Back plane board for
fluoroscopy option
59000109 Non
ANS2 - IGBT driver board
( inside converter module)
06000221 Non
WR - Converter and power
supply
06000247 Tube calibration
HS-1AP- high voltage
transformer for one tube with
connector board KB5 (see chapter 3.2.4)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-3
Board/Module Replaced Order Part Numbers Calibration Parameters to
Check/Calibrate
06000283 Tube calibration
HS-2AP-high voltage transformer
for two tubes with connector
board KB6 (see chapter 3.2.4)
58002159 Configuration:
BE26- Control board inside of the
control panel
- Jumper settings
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
59000220 Configuration:
BE28 - Control board inside of
the interface for remote control
and TFT control panel - Jumper settings
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)

Contact Spellman
X-Ray Tube Configuration:
Replacement tube of the same tube
type:
- Stator connection
(see chapter 2.4.6)
- Tube calibration
(see chapter 3.2.4)
Replacement tube of another tube type:
- Phase shift capacitor
configuration
(see chapter 2.4.6)
- Stator connection
(see chapter 2.4.6)
- Generator with High speed
option HSS1
(see configuration HSS1)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
- Tube calibration
(see chapter 3.2.4)
Contact Spellman Configuration for analog ionization
AEC Ion Chamber (AEC option)
chambers:

- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.4.1.4)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
- AEC calibration
(see chapter 9.4.2.4)
Configuration for digital ionization
chambers:
- Jumper settings
(see chapter 9.5.1.4)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
- AEC calibration
(see chapter 9.5.2.3.1)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-4
Board/Module Replaced Order Part Numbers Calibration Parameters to
Check/Calibrate
Contact Spellman
DAP Configuration:
- Connection of the DAP chamber
(see chapter 2.4.11)
- Generator settings via service
software
(see document 06220011)
Contact Spellman
Bucky Configuration:
- Jumper settings NAG2
(see chapter 7.2.2)
- Bucky interface voltage NAG2
(see chapter 9.1.2)
Contact Spellman Ask Spellman high voltage GmbH for
Image Intensifier
detailed information
(only with fluoroscopy option)
NON
IGBT
Ask Spellman high voltage GmbH for
Automatic Collimator Contact Spellman
detailed information
Ask Spellman high voltage GmbH for
Control Interface Board Contact Spellman
detailed information

Contact Spellman High Voltage GmbH for appropriate revision of the replacement board/module in case the
marking of revision is not clear on the existing board/module.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-5
9.2 Schedule Maintenance:
It is recommended the HFe generator shall be maintained and inspected annually.

Note: If a local regulatory requirement requires maintenance schedule shorter than a


Note
year: the local requirement shall be followed.

9.2.1 Annual inspections/checks:

Warning All inspections are done after the power is OFF, and circuit breaker if OFF

Operating console:

1. Check that symbols and markings on the console didn’t wear out to the point that they can’t be
recognized
2. Check functionality of the console keys/switches
3. Check Exposure switch and cable functionality. (Optional)

X-Ray Generator cabinet:


1. Check for loos cables/connectors and GND wires
2. Check for oil leak from H.V. Module
3. Check H.V. cables for pinches in to the cable or cuts
4. Confirm all labels are in place and legible(compliance, warning labels)
5. Clean if needed dust inside cabinet, and from venting holes

H.V Cables:

1. Disconnect H.V cables from H.V Module ( Causation)


2. Measure cable conductive shield on the metal part from one end to another. The resistance should
be less than 1 ohm/m
3. Clean well old grease compound and put fresh grease compound on all connections, and replace
connectors back.

Calibration Verification:

Verify calibration of generator according to the tests below during installation and annual scheduled
maintenance. If any tests are out of spec recalibrate generator according calibration procedures on Chapter
3.2.4.

9.2.2 Reproducibility and Linearity

Measurements Setup:
• The measurements shall be taken with SID=100 cm or 40”.
• The HVL value should be in accordance to IEC /FDA requirement.
RAD Reproducibility:
The reproducibility test shall be performed twice for 3 point and 2 point technique with test conditions
below. Compliance shall be determined based on 10 consecutive measurements within an hour.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-6
Test condition for 3 point technique:
1. Test # 1 40KV highest mA 100mS
2. Test #2 80KV 100mA 100mS

Test condition for 2 point technique:


1. Test # 1 40KV set mAs that will give 1-5 uGy dose
2. Test # 2 80KV set mAs that will give 1-5 uGy dose

AEC Reproducibility(Apply only to generators with AEC option)

The reproducibility test shall be performed at 2 point technique with test conditions below. Compliance
shall be determined based on 10 consecutive measurements within an hour.

Test condition:

2 point technique 80kV attenuation material thickness shall be adjusted to have exposure time of about
100ms-150ms

n
xi [mR] x [uGy/mR] xi − x ( xi − x ) 2 CV

1
2
3
4 x
5 =(X1+X2+X3+ CV less than
6 X4+X5+X6+X 0.045
7+X8+X9+X1
7 0)/10
8
9
10

Table 8-1: Reproducibility measurement table

S= [ ∑ ( xi − x ) 2 / (n-1)2 ]1/2
CV=S/ x

Where:
S= Standard Deviation

x = Mean Value of dose measurements

Xi = Dose measurement (X1..Xn)


n= Number of dose measurements
CV= Coefficient of variation

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-7
The linearity LIN is calculated from the equation

n
y j − yk yi
LIN = yj = ∑
y j + yk i =1 n

where yj and yk are each the average value of consecutive 10 reading groups of yi [mR/mAs] values

which is the measured dose xi divided by the selected current time product CTP [mAs].
xi
yi =
CTP

Group 1 Gennertor Setting 3 point: 80KV 100mA 100mS


Group 2 Generator Setting 3 point: 80KV 160mA 100mS

group number yj LIN


yi [mR/mAs]
j i [mR/mAs]
1
2
3
4
5
1 6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
2 6
7
8
9
10

Table 8-2: Calculation of linearity

Enter LIN on the Compliance Data Sheet and verify that all values of LIN are equal or less 0.090.
Answer the question on the Linearity on the Compliance Data Sheet.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-8
Generator exposure parameters accuracy

Accuracy test for 3 point technique:

M = Measured Parameter

Test kVp kVp mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA Time time


# Limits Limits Limits Limits Limits Limits [s] Limits
min min min min min min min
max max max max max max max
Set 1 50 46.5 40 43.3 50 46.2 63 58.6 80 74.8 100 94 4.000 3.94
53.5 46.7 53.8 67.4 85.2 106 4.06

M-1
Set 2 60 56.1 160 151 200 190 250 237 320 304 400 380 0.500 .507
63.9 169 210 263 336 420 .493
M-2

Set-3 70 65.7 25 22.4 32 29 40 36.4 50 46.2 63 58.6 2.000 2.03


74.3 27.6 35 43.3 53.8 67.4 1.97
M-3

Set-4 80 75.3 400 380 500 475 630 559 800 761 mA* 5% 0.063 .066
84.7 420 525 661 839 (max) ±1mA .060
M-4

Set-5 90 84.9 63 58.6 80 74.8 100 94 125 118 160 151 0.250 .253
95.1 67.4 85.2 106 132 169 .247
M-5

Set-6 100 94.5 100 94 125 118 160 151 200 190 mA* 5% 0.100 .105
105.5 106 132 169 210 (max) ±1mA .095
M-6

Set-7 120 104.1 16 13.8 20 17.8 25 22.4 32 29 40 36.7 0.400 .406


115.9 18.2 22.4 27.6 35 43.3 .394
M-7

Set-8 140 113.7 250 237 320 304 400 380 500 475 0.100 .105
126.3 263 336 420 525 .095
M-8

Set-9 130 123.3 10 8.1 13 11.9 16 13.8 20 17.6 25 22.4 0.320 .324
136.7 11.9 15.1 18.2 22.4 27.6 .316
M-9

Set- 100 94.5 10 8.1 13 11.9 16 13.8 20 17.6 25 22.4 1.000 1.014
10 105.5 11.9 15.1 18.2 22.4 27.6 .986
M-10

Table 8-3: Test Parameter Assignment Table, 3-Point-Technique


Notes:
1. * indicates the maximum current the generator can be set at given KVP.
2. Depending on generator power some mA setting may not be applicable

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-9
Accuracy test for 2 point technique:

Set

M = Measured Parameter

Test # kVp mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs mAs Limits mAs mAs
Limits Limits Limits
Set-1 50 250 240 320 307 400 384 500 480
260 333 416 520
M-1

Set-2 60 125 114 160 146 200 182 250 240


137 174 218 260
M-2

Set-3 70 50 45 63 57 80 73 100 91
55 69 87 109
M-3

Set-4 80 40 36.2 50 45 63 57 80 73
43.8 55 69 87
M-4

Set-5 100 89 7.06 10 8.88 13 11.6 16 14.3


8.94 11.2 14.4 17.7
M-5

Set-6 120 6.3 5.51 8 7.06 10 8.9 13 11.6


7.09 8.94 11.1 14.4
M-6

Set -7 140 2.5 2.05 3.2 2.29 4.0 3.42 5 4.33


2.95 3.71 4.58 5.67
M-7

Set -8 100 1 0.69 1.3 0.96 1.6 1.24 2.0 1.6


1.31 1.64 1.96 2.4
M-8

Table 8-4: Test Parameter Assignment Table, 2-Point-Technique

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-10
9.2.3 Replacement Parts Modules and electronic boards.
The list below contains standard replacement parts for HFe Generator. Contact manufacture for parts that do
not included in the lists below.

Board/Module Description Part Number Comments


HZG1 - Filament heating board 59000129
NAG2 - Device interface / low speed 59000299
starter
BA6 - Automatic exposure control board 58002099
BA7 - Automatic exposure control board 59000319 The board is delivered with
microprocessor board MP16.
For this the information about
SW Version is needed.
ZST2 - Central controller board 59000079 The board is delivered with
microprocessor board MP16.
For this the information about
SW Version is needed.
IFC1 – Standard Interface Board 460319-001 Allows communication with
generator by serial or Ethernet
interface. GUI interface
available.
IFF1 - Fluoroscopy interface 59000259 The board is delivered with
(only with fluoroscopy option) microprocessor board MP16.
For this the information about
SW Version is needed.
UNI1 - Universal fluoroscopy connector 59000339* Information about the jumper
adapter(only with fluoroscopy option) configuration is needed
HSS1 - High speed starter 06000274 The module is delivered with
microprocessor board MP16.
For this the information about
SW Version is needed.
HSS2 - High speed starter 406935-001 This module is an option for use
with the IFC1 interface board.
59000099
BUS2 - Back plane board for radiography
59000269
BUS4 - Back plane board for fluoroscopy
option
59000109
ANS2 - IGBT driver board ( inside
converter module)
06000221
WR - Converter and power supply
06000247
HS-1AP- high voltage transformer for one
tube
06000283
HS-2AP- high voltage transformer for two
tubes
58002159 The board is delivered with
BE26- Control board inside of the control
microprocessor board MP16.
panel
For this the information about
SW Version is needed.
59000220
BE28 - Control board inside of the
interface for remote control

9.3 Fuses Editor HFe

9.3.1 Replacement of fuses:


- Use only fuses for replacement from the same type and with the same ratings as listed in the tables
below.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-11
- Turn of all power to the Dual Generator before replacing a fuse. Make sure with multi-meter that
zero voltage is present between both sides of fuse holder and return.

9.3.2 Fuse tables


Fuses on the printed circuit boards (PCB) inside of the electronic cabinet
Fuse Location Fuse Manufacturer Fuse rating Spellman part
designation Fuse type number
BUS2 PCB F1, F2, F3, Littlefuse T630mA L 250V 61002354
F4 218 Series
Amp: 630mA time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @
250Vac
5x20mm
F5 Littlefuse T100mA L 250V 61001581
218 Series
Amp: 100mA time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @
250Vac
5x20mm
HZG1 PCB F1 Littlefuse T3.15A L 250V 61002121
218 Series
Amp: 3.15A time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @
250Vac
5x20mm
NAG2 PCB F1 Littlefuse T1A L 250V 61002248
218 Series
Amp: 1A time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @
250Vac
5x20mm
F2 Littlefuse T6.3mA L 250VAmp: 6.3A 60003095
218 Series time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 63A @
250Vac
5x20mm
F2 (optional) Littlefuse T10A H 250V
216 Series
Amp: 10A time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 1500A @
250Vac
5x20mm
F4, F5 Littlefuse T50mA L 250VAmp: 50mA 61002085
218 Series time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @
250Vac
5x20mm

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-12
F3* Littlefuse T315mA L 125VAmp: See note*
395 Series 315mA time lag,
Voltage: 125V
Interrupting: 100A @
125Vac
TE5 soldered*
F1 Littlefuse F20A H 250V
BLN Series
Amp: 20A fast acting,
BLN020
HSS1 PCB Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 10kA @
250Vac
Midget 10x38mm
HSS2 PCB F1, F2 Littlefuse 105721-232
F15A, 600V
KLKD015 Amp: 15A fast acting,
Voltage: 600V Interrupting:
10kA @ 600Vac
Midget 10x38mm
Line Input Board 480V

*) The fuse F3 on the PCB NAG2 is soldered. Replace the board NAG2 if this fuse is broken.

Fuses inside converter cabinet


Fuse Location Fuse Manufacturer Fuse rating Spellman part number
designation Fuse type
ANS2 PCB F1, F4 Littlefuse T500mA L 250V 60003093
218 Series
Amp: 500mA time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @ 250Vac
5x20mm
F2, F3 Littlefuse T250mA L 250V 61002249
218 Series
Amp: 250mA time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @ 250Vac
5x20mm

Fuses on sub distribution


Fuse Location Fuse Manufacturer Fuse rating Spellman part number
designation Fuse type
Terminal block F6 Littlefuse T1A L 250V 61002248
X3 218 Series
Amp: 1A time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 35A @ 250Vac
5x20mm
Terminal block F5 Littlefuse T6.3mA L 250V 60003095
X5 218 Series
Amp: 6.3A time lag,
Voltage: 250V
Interrupting: 63A @ 250Vac
5x20mm

Optional fuses of 3 phases autotransformer 480VAC – 400VAC, WYE


Fuse Location Fuse Manufacturer Fuse rating Spellman part number
designation Fuse type

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-13
Terminal block F1 (3 x) BUSSMANN T60A H 600V 61002130
X1 LPJ-60SP
Amp: 60A,
Voltage: 600Vac,
Interrupting: 300kA @
600Vac
time delay fuse ClassJ

Optional fuses of 3 phases autotransformer 208VAC – 400VAC, WYE


Fuse Location Fuse Manufacturer Fuse rating Spellman part number
designation Fuse type
Terminal block F1 (3 x) BUSSMANN T100A H 600V 61002124
X1 LPJ-100SP
Amp: 100A,
Voltage: 600Vac,
Interrupting: 300kA @
600Vac
time delay fuse ClassJ,

Mixed Replacement Parts

Add parts that are commonly replaced


Part Description Part Number Comments
Low Speed Starter Capacitor 30uF 60008600 Inclusive cables and
mounting material
Low Speed Starter Capacitor 15uF Inclusive cables and
mounting material
IGBT Buckconverter inside converter 61001826 Inclusive cables and
mounting material
IGBT H Bridge (40kW, 50kW) 61002148 Inclusive cables and
mounting material
IGBT H Bridge (65kW, 80kW) Inclusive cables and
mounting material
Battery ZST2 CR2032

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 9-14
10 Options

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-15
10.1 Generator interface board NAG2

10.1.1 Introduction
There are two different construction stages available. The standard version has connections for 2 Bucky
devices and the optional version for 4 Bucky devices.
The configuration can be done by wire jumpers.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-16
10.1.2 Description of the device interface board NAG2
Up to four bucky devices can be connected to the interface board NAG2. The standard version of the NAG2
has connectors for 2 bucky devices interfaced via relays and one connector for digital radiography systems,
interfaced via optocouplers.
The interface voltage for the bucky devices can be connected separately for bucky 1/2 and optional for bucky
3/4. The voltage range is from 24V to 230V ac or dc. The configuration for the interface voltage can easily be
done by jumpers.
The interface voltage is configured to 24VDC as default. This 24VDC (max 80mA) interface voltage is
supplied by an DC/DC converter on the interface board.

10.1.2.1 Front view NAG2

X11 Connector for digital radiography systems

X8 Internal connector of thermo-contacts tube 1 and tube 2

X10 Internal connector of door-contacts room 1 and room 2

X20 Connector preparation output

X9 Connector input interface voltage for Bucky 1 and 2

X3 Connector bucky device 1

X4 Connector bucky device 2

Optional connectors

X21 Connector preparation output

X12 Connector input interface voltage for Bucky 3 and 4

X5 Connector bucky device 3

X6 Connector bucky device 4

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-17
10.1.2.2 View component side NAG2

Internal interface
connection to the ZST2

+24V/IF (max. 80mA)


Interface power supply

J1 wire jumper
24V closed
230V opened

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-18
10.1.2.3 Connector pin assignment NAG2 (Standard version)

- X11 Connection of digital radiography systems

Pin Signal name Description


1 +24V/IF Interface voltage +24V DC (max 80mA)
2 Bucky Start Output Bucky Start
3 Active if generator is ready for exposure.
4 Bucky Input enable signal from bucky or DR interface
5 Exposure starts immediately.
6 Output signal
EXON_DELAY Exon_delay: Signal after exposure with time
delay (not used)
or
Prep: active during preparation
PREP
7 STR_SYNC Output signal synchronous to X-ray
8 Active during X-ray is on.
9 / 12 BUCKY1_SELECT Output signal, active if device 1 activated
10 / 13 BUCKY2_SELECT Output signal, active if device 2 activated
11 / 14 BUCKY3_SELECT Output signal, active if device 3 activated
15 GND/IF Ground of the Interface voltage

- X8 internal connection of the tube thermo-contacts

Pin Signal name Description


1 >70°C_T1 Input Thermo-contact tube 1 (24Vdc)
2 GND/IF 0V
3 GNG/IF 0V
4 >70°C_T2 Input Thermo-contact tube 2 (24Vdc)

- X10 internal connection of the door contacts

Pin Signal name Description


1 DOOR1 Input door-contact of room 1 (24Vdc)
2 GND/IF 0V
3 GNG/IF 0V
4 DOOR2 Input door-contact of room 2 (24Vdc)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-19
- X9 Supply input Interface voltage for bucky device 1 and 2

Pin Signal name Description


1 U1 Between 24V AC/DC and 230V AC
2 GND/U1 GND or Neutral
3 Not used

- X3 / X4 Connection bucky device 1 and 2

Pin Signal name Description


1 BS1 / BS2 Output Bucky Start
2 WS1 / WS2 Output Device Selection 1/2
3 B_RET1 /B_RET2 Input Bucky return 1/2
4 B_GND_RET1/2 Ground for input pin 3
5 B_GND_1/2 Ground for output pin 1 and 2

- X20 Connection for preparation output

Pin Signal name Description


1 PREP Output. Preparation
2 Open relay contact. Closed during preparation.

10.1.2.4 Additional connectors with maximum assembly (Option Bucky 3 und 4)

- X12 Supply input Interface voltage for bucky device 3 and 4

Pin Signal name Description


1 U1 Between 24V AC/DC and 230V AC
2 GND/U1 GND or Neutral
3 Not used

- X5 / X6 Connection bucky device 3 and 4

Pin Signal name Description


1 BS3 / BS4 Output Bucky Start
2 WS3 / WS4 Output Device Selection 3/4
3 B_RET3 /B_RET4 Input Bucky return 3/4
4 B_GND_RET3/4 Ground for input pin 3
5 B_GND_3/4 Ground for output pin 3 and 4

- X21 Connection for preparation output

Pin Signal name Description


1 PREP Output. Preparation
2 Open relays contact. Closed during preparation

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-20
10.1.2.5 Jumper settings NAG2 (Default 24VDC)
The picture shows the default jumper settings. The jumper settings can be changed depending on the
application.

The green framed parts are not assembled with the standard interface board NAG2.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-21
10.1.2.5.1 Description of the jumpers

JP3 and JP4 must not be closed together at the same time. The output of the optocoupler OK3 can be
damaged in this case.

Jumper Description Default


JP1 Smoothing of the bucky return signal if an AC interface voltage is opened
used.
JP2
Opened: DC Interface voltage
Closed: AC Interface voltage
JP3 Output Bucky Start LOW active (JP3 closed, JP4 opened) closed
JP4 Output Bucky Start HIGH active (JP3 opened, JP4 closed) opened
JP5 Pre-resistor for the 24V/IF output (JP5 bridged the resistor) closed
JP6 Signal selection for connector X11 Pin 6
1-2: PREP preparation signal 1-2
2-3: Exon_Delay time delayed signal after exposure
(not used)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-22
10.1.2.5.2 Description of the wire jumpers

Wire Description Default


jumper
J1_1-2 Pre-resistor for Interface voltages higher than 24V closed
Closed: 24V Bucky Interface voltage
Opened: 230V Bucky Interface voltage
J2_1-2 Optional assembled optional
Same function as wire jumper J1

The interface board NAG2 provides an interface voltage of 24V DC (max 80mA) on connector X13. This can
be used for bucky devices with 24V interfaces. The configuration must be changed if the bucky interface
needs another interface voltage.

The following three pictures show the configurations for different interface voltages.

10.1.2.5.3 24V DC internal interface voltage (default)

The 24V DC (max 80mA) interface voltage is provided on the connector X13.
X13.1 (lower connector) = 24Vdc
X13.2 (upper connector) = 0V
J1_1 – J1_2 closed
JP1 opened

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-23
10.1.2.5.4 24V AC external interface voltage

The 24Vac interface voltage is not provided by the generator in the standard configuration. An optional
24Vac power supply can be ordered.
J1_1 – J1_2 closed
JP1 closed

10.1.2.5.5 230V AC interface voltage

A separate delivered insulated cable can be used to connect the NAG2 connector X9 to the 230Vac
connector X5 on the sub-distribution in the case that the bucky devices need a 230Vac interface voltage. X5
on the sub-distribution is fused with 6,3A.
J1_1 – J1_2 opened
JP1 closed

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-24
10.2 Fluoroscopy Interface

10.2.1 General information


This chapter contains useful information to interface a fluoroscopy imaging system to the EDITOR HFe. The
service person is responsible for the correct data coupling. The connections described are necessary for the
intended use.

WARNING:

A connection failure, a modification, an upgrade or disconnecting any part of the involved items
from the network/ data coupling may produce the following hazardous situations:
• The automatic brightness control may not reach the correct value
• The automatic exposure control may not terminate the exposure at the correct time
• The obtained image may be corrupted, not stored properly or not been triggered properly
• The communication with the imaging system may be corrupted
• Communication errors lead to error messages either on the generator or the imaging system,
which will block the further operation

WARNING:

The integrator / assembler is responsible to identify, analyze and control all additional risks arising
from the integration. Especially changes to the data coupling, any data coupling configuration
change, any connection or disconnection of additional items to the data coupling and any update of
connected equipment may introduce new risks and require a new analysis by the composer.
The integrator / assembler has to verify the correct integration according to the fluoroscopy imaging
system's service manual provided by its manufacturer.

The fluoroscopy interface of the EDITOR HFe consists of two boards:

- IFF1 (Interface Fluoroscopy): A programmable Interface with galvanic isolated inputs and outputs to
the imaging system.
- UNI1 (UNIversal adapter): An additional board to adapt the galvanic isolated inputs and outputs of
the IFF1 to the inputs and outputs of the TV system and the x-ray device.

The interface has many special in- and outputs to control a wide range of different TV-chains provided by
different manufacturers. It is possible to select presettings for special TV-chains in the generator setup.

The generator supports three different kinds of fluoroscopy modes:

- Low contrast fluoroscopy (LCF)


- high level fluoroscopy (HLF)
- high contrast pulsed fluoroscopy (HCF)

All three modes work with manual and automatic dosage control.

Low contrast fluoroscopy (LCF): Mode 1


Continuous fluoroscopy
kV-range: 40kV – 125kV
mA-range: 0,5mA – 5mA

high level fluoroscopy (HLF): Mode 2

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-25
Continuous fluoroscopy, maximum 60s (default 20s)
kV-range: 40kV – 125kV
mA-range: 1mA – 10mA

high contrast pulsed fluoroscopy (HCF): Mode 3


pulsed fluoroscopy
Pulse length : 2ms – 50ms
kV-range: 40kV – 125kV
mA-range: 10mA – 150mA

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-26
10.2.2 IFF1 Overview of the LEDs, Jumpers and connectors

10.2.2.1 Positions of the LEDs, jumpers and connectors

Figure 9-1: Simplified diagram of the IFF1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-27
10.2.2.2 LEDs of the IFF1
Signal description see chapter 9.2.4
LED Color Direction Signal name
V5 green Input RESI1\
V6 green Supply +24V/E
V8 green Input RESI2\
V14 green Input MA_1\
V15 green Input KV_UP\
V16 green Output STR_DEV\
V17 green Output PREP_Q\
V18 green Output RESO1\
V19 green Output RESO5\
V30 green Supply +12V
V37 green Input RESI3\ (ABS)
V38 green Input PFL\
V39 green Input MA_2\
V40 green Input MA_3\
V41 green Input RESI5\
V42 green Input KV_DOWN\
V43 green Output DEV
V44 green Input EXP\
V45 green Output STR_DLY\
V46 green Output FLUORO_Q\
V47 green Output LIH\
V48 green Output START\
V49 green Output RESO10\
V50 green Output PWM-A1\
V51 green Output RESO2\
V52 green Output RESO3\
V53 green Output RESO4\
V54 green Output RESO6\
V55 green Output RESO7\
V56 green Output RESO8\
V57 green Supply +12V/E
V58 green Supply -12V/E
V60 green Input PREP\
V61 green Input FLUORO\
V62 green Input XPULS
V63 green Output RESO8\
V64 green Output IMG_BL
V65 green Output ABC_ACT
V66 green Supply +5V
V68 green Output DEVX

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-28
10.2.2.3 Jumpers and switches

Jumper Default Function


X1 Closed terminating resistor of the CAN BUS
X3 Opened Adaptation of the analog input for the automatic brightness control signal to
different TV-chains. Input for continuous fluoroscopy
X4 Closed
X10 opened Adaptation of the analog input for the automatic brightness control signal for
different TV-chains. Input for pulsed fluoroscopy
X11 closed
X19 Opened Only for factory use

S1 All off Not used

10.2.2.4 Potentiometers

Potentiometer Function
R90 Adjustment of the analog optocoupler for continuous fluoroscopy. Adjusted in factory
R91 Adjustment of the analog optocoupler for continuous fluoroscopy. Adjusted in factory

10.2.2.5 Test points

Test point Signal Function


X2 -12V/E External -12V DC for galvanic isolated serial port
X5 (ABC_C_1) Analog signal for the brightness control during continuous fluoroscopy
X12 (ABC_C_2) Analog signal for the brightness control during pulsed fluoroscopy
X13 +12V/E External +12V DC interface voltage
X15 +24V/E External +24V DC interface voltage
X18 GND/E External ground 0V

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-29
10.2.3 UNI1 Overview of the LEDs, Jumpers and connectors

10.2.3.1 Positions of the LEDs, jumpers and connectors

Figure 9-2: Simplified diagram of the UNI1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-30
10.2.3.2 LED UNI1

LED Color Signal name


V57 green +24V/EG

10.2.3.3 Jumper UNI1

Jumper Default Function


X1 Opened Connect GND/E to shielding
X2 1-2 High active Low / high active output
X3 Opened Activate inverter for special TV-chain
X4 1-2 High active Low / high active output
X5 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X8 2-3 +24V External interface voltage +12V or +24V
X9 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X16 1-2 / 3-4 Low active Low / high active input
X17 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X18 1-2 / 3-4 Low active Low / high active input
X19 1-2 / 3-4 Low active Low / high active input
X20 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X25 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X26 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X27 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X28 Closed Connects PREP to EXP
X29 2-3 Low active Low / high active Input
X30 1-2 positive positive/negative impedance converter (see X41)
X31 1-2 positive positive/negative impedance converter (see X42)
X32 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X33 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X34 Opened Activate inverter
X35 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X36 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active output
X37 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X38 Opened Not used
X39 Opened Not used
X40 Closed One ABC TV-chains with two or one brightness control signals
X41 2-3 positive OP N5A positive/negative impedance converter (see X30)
X42 2-3 positive OP N5B positive/negative impedance converter (see X31)
X43 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X44 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X45 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X46 2-3 Low active Low / high active input

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-31
Jumper Default Function
X47 2-3 Low active Low / high active Input
X48 2-3 Low active Low / high active Input
X49 1-2 / 3-4 High active Low / high active Output
X50 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X51 2-3 Low active Low / high active Input
X52 2-3 Low active Low / high active Input
X53 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X54 Opened Activates inverter
X55 Opened Activates inverter
X56 Opened Activates inverter
X57 Opened Activates inverter
X58 Opened Activates inverter
X59 Opened Activates inverter
X60 Opened Activates inverter
X61 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X62 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X63 1-2 Low-active Low / high active output
X108 Closed
X112 Closed Enable +12V/E for input PREP
X113 Closed Enable +12V/E for input EXP
X114 Closed Enable +12V/E for input XPULS
X115 Opened Pull up for special TV-chains
X116 Opened Pull up for special TV-chains
X117 Closed
X118 2-3 Low active Low / high active input
X119 2-3 Low active Low / high active input

10.2.3.4 Test points

Test point Signal Test point Signal


X64 STR-DLY X88 +24V/EG
X65 LIH X89 AEC-
X66 ABC-ACT X90 AEC+
X67 IMG-BL X91 RS232_TXD1
X68 MA-1 X92 ABC_C_1
X69 MA-2 X93 ABC_C_2
X70 MA-3 X94 PF
X71 RESI-1 X95 XPULS2
X72 RESI-2 X96 START

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-32
X73 RESI-3 (ABS) X97 XPULS
X74 RESI-4 X98 GND/E
X75 KV-DOWN X99 GND/AEC
X76 GND/E X100 RS232_RXD1
X77 RESO-1 X101 PREP-Q
X78 RESO-2 X102 FLUORO-Q
X79 RESO-3 X103 DEV-A
X80 RESO-4 X104 DEV-B
X81 RESO-5 X105 PREP
X82 RESO-6 X106 EXP
X83 RESO-7 X107 FLUORO
X84 RESO-8 X109 GND/E
X85 RESO-9 X110 GND/AEC
X86 +12V/E X111 GND/A
X87 KV-UP

10.2.3.5 Connectors

Connector Function
X10 Input for special applications
X11 Input for special applications
X12 Input for special applications
X13 Connection to the BA6 for TV-systems without an own automatic exposure control
X14 Film focus distance input
X15 Connection to motor driven collimator. Provided by optional control panel.
X21 RS232 communication port
X22 Connection for footswitch or to the x-ray device.
X23 Connection to the TV- system (parallel inputs/outputs)
X24 Connection to the TV- system (parallel inputs/outputs)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-33
10.2.4 Signal description in- and output
The interface for fluoroscopy provides many inputs and outputs which are only used for special applications
and some special TV-systems.
The following sections describe only the standard in- and outputs. The special in- and outputs are named
RESIx or RESOx (reserved).

10.2.4.1 Digital inputs


Each digital input is switchable between a high-active or low-active input. Two different types of inputs are
available.

10.2.4.1.1 Low / high active inputs


a. Inputs with two wires. Example input PREP
Low active input High active input

 

b. Inputs with only one wire. Example input KV-DOWN


Low active input High active input

 

10.2.4.1.2 Signal description

Signal name Description


PREP Preparation ON from x-ray device.
EXP Exposure ON from x-ray device.
X-ray starts on receiving signal XPULSE or XPULSE2
FLUORO Fluoroscopy ON from x-ray device.
X-ray starts on receiving signal XPULSE or XPULSE2
XPULS X-ray ON from x-ray device.
XPULS2 X-ray ON from x-ray device.
PF Request for pulsed fluoroscopy from x-ray device.
Only activatedin special applications and by special TV-systems
MA-1 – MA-3 Four different fluoroscopy current steps. Can be set by x-ray device. Programmable
between 0.5mA and 5mA. If no MA-x input is active, MA0 is set. See setup program: X-
ray device-settings
KV-UP Increase fluoroscopy kV in 1kV steps and 5kV/s during fluoroscopy
KV-DOWN Increase fluoroscopy kV in 1kV steps and 5kV/s during fluoroscopy
RESI3 (ABS) Activate the automatic brightness control. This input must be activated permanently if the
generator should be started in automatic mode.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-34
10.2.4.2 Digital outputs
Each digital output is switchable between a high-active or low-active output. Two different types of outputs
are available.

10.2.4.2.1 Low / high active output


c. Outputs with two wires. Example output STE-DEV

Low active input High active input

 

d. Outputs with only one wire. Example output RESO_7

Low active output High active output

 

10.2.4.2.2 Signal description

Signal name Description


STR-DEV Signal synchronous to X-Ray. Starts and stops with converter activity
STR-DLY The signal is identical to STR-DEV with a delay of 10ms
FLUORO-Q Confirmation of the fluoroscopy request signal FLUORO. FLUORO-Q is active if the
generator is ready to start X-ray radiation.
LIH Last image hold signal. Delayed switch-off of the high voltage during fluoroscopy. For
TV-systems which needs a signal to store the last image. The delay time is
programmable. See setup program: X-Ray device-settings
PREP-Q Confirmation of the preparation request signal PREP.
START Generator is ready to start x-ray. This signal is active after the preparation . START can
be used to start the Bucky
ABC-ACT Automatic brightness control is activated
IMG-BL Not used
DEV-A Fluoroscopy device (IFF1) is activated
DEV-B
RESO1-RESO8 Reserved outputs. Not used

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-35
10.2.4.3 Analog inputs
The generator fluoroscopy interface has two separate analog inputs for the dose rate control. One for the
continuous fluoroscopy and one for the pulsed fluoroscopy. The interface works with signals in a range from
–15V to +15V.
The analog input circuit is split into two circuits, an impedance converter on the board UNI1 and the galvanic
isolated input amplifier on the board IFF1.
The impedance converter can work as an inverter or as a voltage follower. The voltage divider from the
galvanic isolated amplifier is changeable to different input voltage ranges.

10.2.4.3.1 Analog input on the board UNI1

voltage follower (amplification = 1) Inverter (amplification = -1)

10.2.4.3.2 Signal description

Signal name Description


ABC_C_1 Analog Brightness Control, analog signal for continuous fluoroscopy
ABC_C_2 Analog Brightness Control, analog signal for pulsed fluoroscopy

The jumper X40 must be closed if the TV-system delivers only one ABC signal for continuous and pulsed
fluoroscopy.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-36
10.2.4.3.3 Galvanic isolated input amplifier on the board IFF1

The output of the impedance converter on the UNI1 goes to the input of the isolated amplifier. The voltage
divider, consisting of R1, R2, R3, R118 and the two jumpers X3 and X4, must be adapted to the analog
output signal of the TV-system. To get a good and fast control of the kV in the automatic fluoroscopy mode,
the input voltage on test point X8 must be in a middle range between 1,5V and 3,5V if the dose rate is
correct. The voltage at test point X5 (GND/E = X18) is nearly the same as the voltage on test point X8 (GND
= X9).

The voltage divider is designed for a wide range of input voltages. The table below shows some samples
and the resulting jumper positions.

Input voltage ABC_C_1 Jumper X3 Jumper X4 Example TV chains


range
-15V…+15V closed closed FLXIS (Philips)
-10V…+10V closed closed CD1000 (ATS)
0V…+10V open closed
0V…+5V open open CD100 (ATS)

10.2.5 Hardware settings for a standard TV system

On the next pages the standard default hardware settings, connections to a TV-chain with x-ray device and
the timing diagrams are shown.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-37
10.2.5.1 Jumper settings IFF1 standard

Figure 9-3: Default jumper settings IFF1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-38
10.2.5.2 Jumper settings UNI1 standard

Figure 9-4: Default jumper settings UNI1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-39
10.2.5.3 Interfacing a standard TV-chain system
The connectors X22, X23, X24 are the connection to the TV-system.

A foot switch or the x-ray device can be connected to connector X22 to give the start signal for exposures
and fluoroscopy.

X23 contains the most important signals to connect a modern TV-system.

X24 contains signals for special applications and for seldom systems. Most of the pins are reserved inputs
and outputs.

The jumper X28 must be set if the x-ray device sends only an exposure start signal (no preparation signal).
With a closed jumper X28 the signals for preparation and exposure are combined to one.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-40
10.2.5.3.1 Block diagram

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-41
10.2.5.3.2 Timing diagram continuous fluoroscopy

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-42
10.2.5.3.3 Timing diagram for exposure

The exposure stops upon releasing the hand switch or when the exposure time has expired.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-43
10.2.6 Software settings
The generator software is prepared for many different TV-image systems. The presets are selectable in the
device settings.
Each device can be set as a fluoroscopy device. The example shows the setting of the device 3.

10.2.6.1 Fluoroscopy “device settings”


The fluoroscopy interface IFF1 is connected to the internal CAN BUS. The communication device must be
set to “Fluoro”.
In the “device types” “grid” must be set to IFF1 if the exposure will be started by this device. The “device
type” “fluoro” can be set to different TV imaging systems or to a default fluoro TV-system. The “imaging
systems” contains presettings for special TV-systems. For example:

Imaging system 1 = ROE-1


Imaging system 2 = CD1000
Imaging system 3 = FLXIS
etc

The information in this document refer to the “device type” “fluoro” = “fluoro”.

In the device type “no grid” it is possible to set a device to a device using fluoroscopy only without any
radiography functions. For this operation the checkbox "Enable device" has to be deactivated.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-44
10.2.6.2 Fluoroscopy “X-ray device settings”
Press the button “X-ray device settings” to change the generator settings for fluoroscopy. The following
window appears.

On the left side are the radiography settings for the fluoroscopy device and on the right side are the
fluoroscopy settings for the fluoroscopy device.

- Last image hold change the length of the LIH signal


- HCF pulselength maximal pulse length during pulsed fluoroscopy
- HLF max time max time for fluoroscopy in High Level Fluoroscopy (HLF)
- Filter and Zoom Preset of filter and zoom. Only used by “Imaging system 1-5”
- Fluoro kV to mA If active, the mA is coupled to the kV. No manual mA adjustment possible.
- Fluoro HLF points definition of the slope change coordinates of the low mA/kV and high mA/kV
curves, if the “kV to mA auto mode” is active (see Figure )
- Fluoro LCF points definition of the slope change coordinates of the low mA/kV and high mA/kV
curves, if the “kV to mA auto mode” is active (see Figure )
- Fluoro LCF 2-6 not used
- Fluoro dig. Inputs Fluoro mA values remote controlled by the input signals MA1-MA3 on the UNI1
board

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-45
Figure 9-5: The tube current control curve depending on tube voltage during fluoroscopy
1: Low Contrast Fluoroscopy LCF
2: High Level Fluoroscopy HLF

10.2.6.3 Fluoroscopy “KV-control settings”


To change the characteristics of the automatic brightness control ABC, the parameters in the window
“inverter adjust” must be changed.

Menu  Settings  kV control settings…

It is possible to work with an analog dose error signal from the TV-image system for a fast automatic
brightness control or with digital signals to change the high voltage in 1kV steps.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-46
The “write to gen” button will be active after the parameter are read from the generator.

10.2.6.3.1 Automatic brightness control via the analog inputs “ABC_C_1” and “ABC_C_2”
The ABC values in the window on the left side (1) are for continuous fluoroscopy and on
the right site (2) are for pulsed fluoroscopy.

The regulation speed can be changed by the kp factor. 100 is the default value.
The “ABC set point” must be set to the values, measured on test point X8 for continuous fluoroscopy and on
test point X14 for pulsed fluoroscopy on the board IFF1, when the dose rate has reached the correct value. It
is also possible to measure the voltage with the service program in the test window of the IFF1(see Figure ).
The dose rate on the input of the image intensifier must be in an appropiate range. (for example 305nGµ/s at
70kV, normal zoom on an 11” image intensifier and a phantom of 25mm AL)

The IFF1 is preset for a analog dose error input signal in a range from +10 .. –10V. The IFF1 shifts the input
voltage in a positive range between 0 to +5V. This means, 0V from the TV chain results in an analog input
signal ABC_C of approx +3,2V.

If the input range of this signal is different the jumpers X3 and X4 must be changed.

Input voltage Jumper X3 Jumper X4


ABC_C_1 range
-15V…+15V closed closed
-10V…+10V closed closed
0V…+10V open closed
0V…+5V open open
The hysteresis can be changed if the system is to sensitive or if the error dose signal from the TV chain is
noisy.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-47
10.2.6.3.2 Automatic brightness control by the digital inputs “KV_UP” and “KV_DOWN”
To work only with the digital inputs KV_UP and KV_DOWN the parameter “ABC kp factor” must be set to 0.
In this case the analog inputs are deactivated.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-48
10.2.6.4 Test function of the interface IFF1
The values for ABC can be measured by a multimeter or directly via the service software in the test window
of the IFF1.

Figure 9-6: Test functions IFF1


Press the button “Read” during fluoroscopy showing the correct dose rate to get the present value of the
analog inputs ABC_C1 and ABC_C2. If the dose rate is in an appropiate range, set the value of the
parameter “ABC set point” in the setting window “kV control” to this value.

For example:
During fluoroscopy at 70kV and a dose rate of approximately 305nGy the measured ABC value using the
test window is 2,84V. In this case set the “ABC set point” = 2.90. If the measured values vary a little bit
between two measurements the hysteresis has to be increased.

Figure 9-6: Automatic brightness control parameters

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-49
10.3 The high speed starter HSS1

10.3.1 Important information

Warning!

The high-speed starter works with dangerous high voltages. The capacitors are still
charged, after turning off the generator

The discharge of the capacitors on the HSS1 module needs at least. 150s after switch-
off.

The capacitors must be discharged before the hardware settings can be changed.

It is absolutely essential to ensure that the tube is not rotating on high speed, if the
generator is turned off.

An uncontrolled deceleration of the anode can cause damage to the bearings of the
anode plate and thereby damaging the tube.

Turn on the generator immediately, when it is switched off during the tube is running
on high speed. The tube will be braked automatically after switching on.

- The connection of non-listed X-ray tubes is not permitted or require prior consultation with the
Spellman GmbH Bochum

- For the connection of two X-ray tubes, make sure that both can be operated with the same stator
voltage. A combination of X-ray tubes with different stator voltage is not possible

- The high-speed starts are limited to 4 per minute, to protect the connected X-ray tube.

- All hardware settings on the High speed starter module and the tube settings in the Generator setup
must be set to comply with the connected x-ray tube before switching on.

Verify:

o Stator voltage
o Phase shift capacitor
o Start time
o Brake time
o Anode data at 150Hz
o Maximum tube current

Wrong settings can damage the tube or the high-speed starter.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-50
- The stator connecting cable must be designed to fulfill the following minimum requirements:

shielded cable: Shield connected on both sides


normal voltage: min. 1000V
conductor cross-section: min. 1,5mm²
number of wires: 4 (U,V,W and PE)

A stator cable can be ordered at Spellman GmbH Bochum

10.3.2 Function description


The high-speed starter consists of a frequency inverter, a control unit and a power supply. It is used to drive
rotating anode X-ray tubes that are equipped with a two-phase induction motor. The frequency inverter
consists of a full bridge and a phase shift capacitor for each tube.
The microprocessor unit “MP16” controls the high-speed starter, which is connected to the internal CAN bus
of the generator.

Types of operation:

- Rotation during fluoroscopy


o 33Hz anode start lasting a second.
o 33Hz interval drive to maintain the rotation during fluoroscopy.

- Rotation during exposure:


o 160/166/173/180Hz anode start lasting 1 to 2s

- Continuous running after exposure:


o High speed rotation, runtime variable between 0s and 30s
o 160/166/173/180Hz programmable interval drive to hold the rotation during preparation

- Anode braking
o 3s – 6s deceleration of the anode rotation below 3000 U/min

The anode will be accelerated with reduced energy on each exposure if the tube is running on high speed.

The timer of continuous running will be started again on each exposure.

The high speed starter will reduce the rotor speed below 3000 r/min after the end of the continuous running
interval has been reached or if the preparation is stopped during the high speed start time.

The high-speed starter starts a safety-braking each time the generator is switched on.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-51
10.3.3 Overview of the hardware

10.3.3.1 Overview of the high speed starter module

10.3.3.2 External connectors

10.3.3.2.1 X6 Tube 1

Pin Name Function


1 V Common tube 1
2 Not used
3 W Main phase tube 1
4 U Shift phase tube 1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-52
10.3.3.2.2 X9 Tube 2 (Not available in HSS1 Option 1)

Pin Name Function


1 V Common tube 2
2 Not used
3 W Main phase tube 2
4 U Shift phase tube 2

10.3.3.2.3 X17 Mains

Pin Name Function


1 Not used
2 N Neutral
3 L Phase 230V AC

10.3.3.2.4 X2 and X15 CAN-BUS

Pin Name Function


1 CANH CAN-BUS high
2 CANL CAN-BUS low
3 NOT+EXT Not used
4 NOT-EXT Not used
5 STR_DEV Not used
6 XPULS Not used
7 +24V/E +24V for galvanic isolation of the CAN-BUS
8 GND/E GND for galvanic isolation of the CAN-BUS

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-53
10.3.4 Overview of the PCB HSS1

10.3.4.1 Standard version

10.3.4.2 Option 1 version

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-54
10.3.4.3 Light emitting diodes LED

LED Number Color Function


V9 red Error status bit 0 *
V10 red Error status bit 1 *
V11 red Error status bit 2 *
V12 red Error status bit 3 *
V17 green Enable exposure
V20 green Inverter overcurrent
V24 green +5V DC, Supply voltage Microcontroller
V29 green +12V DC extern, supply voltage IGBT-driver
V32 yellow Tube 2 enabled
V33 yellow Tube 1 enabled
*Error description see chapter 9.3.9

10.3.4.4 Potentiometer

Poti-Number Function
R44 Adjustment of the maximum allowed converter current

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-55
10.3.4.5 Switches

Switch Number Function


S1 Separate settings for tube 1 *
S2 Separate settings for tube 2 *(Not used for option 1)
S3 Common settings for tube 1 and tube 2 *
* Description of the switches see chapter 9.3.6

10.3.4.6 Jumpers

Jumper Default Function


JP1 opened Only for factory setup
X1 2-3 Only for factory setup
X4 opened Terminating resistor of the CAN BUS
X9 1-2 Hardware/software controlled enabling of the exposure
1-2 software controlled
2-3 hardware controlled (only for factory use)

10.3.4.7 Wired jumpers

10.3.4.7.1 Phase shift capacitor for Tube 1

Connection Function
X11, X12, X13, X14 See chapter 9.3.7.1.4

10.3.4.7.2 Phase shift capacitor for Tube 2

Connection Function
X20, X21, X22, X23 See chapter 9.3.7.1.4

10.3.4.7.3 Stator operating voltage

Connection Function
X3.1, X3.2, X3.3 See chapter 9.3.7.1.4

10.3.4.7.4 Factory setup connections

Connection Function
X16.1 – X16.2 and Wired jumper, disconnects the mains from the control
X16.3 – X16.4 unit and the power unit.
Disconnect only for factory setup.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-56
10.3.4.8 Test points

TP Signal Function
TP1 INVFRQA\ Control signal of the Inverter IGBT V1 and V4
TP2 INVFRQB\ Control signal of the Inverter IGBT V2 and V3
TP3 / IBR IBR Active value of the inverter current
TP4 / +5V +5V Power supply +5V DC microcontroller
TP5 / GND GND Ground microcontroller
TP6 / ISOLL ISOLL Maximum valid inverter current (default 1,8V)
TP7 +UZK positive intermediate circuit voltage

TP8 -UZK negative intermediate circuit voltage

TP9 / 12V +12V_EXT Power supply +12V (external) of the IGBT driver
TP10 / GND/12 GND_12 Power supply GND (external) of the IGBT driver

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-57
10.3.5 Assembly of the HSS1 module
The main distribution of the x-ray generator must be prepared for the assembly of the high-speed starter.
The HSS1 will be switched on with the contact of contactor K1

For a later assembly of the module the following parts must be built into the main distribution:

06000293 “Assembly set HSS1 96cm-cabinet”


Or
06000294 “Assembly set HSS1 1,1m-cabinet"

Separate service information is delivered with these assembly sets.

Standard version Option 1 version

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-58
10.3.6 Hardware settings for Standard version
The HSS1 can drive two tubes with different start and brake times but only with the same stator voltage. The
settings must be set before the first start.

For both tubes together:

- Stator voltage
- Frequency 160/180Hz
- Continuous running interval

For each tube separately:

- Shift capacitor
- Start frequency of the high speed start
- End frequency of the high speed start
- Pulse width of the brake
- Timing of the continuous running

10.3.7 Hardware settings for Option 1 version


The HSS1 can drive one. The settings must be set before the first start.

Settings:

- Stator voltage
- Frequency 160/180Hz
- Continuous running interval
- Shift capacitor
- Start frequency of the high speed start
- End frequency of the high speed start
- Pulse width of the break
- Timing of the continuous running

Important information:

- The DIP switches S3.1, S3.2, S3.7 and S3.8 are only for factory use. Other settings of these
switches can damage the tube.

- The settings have to be checked by the authorized service technician.


Responsible for the correct settings is the authorized service company.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-59
10.3.7.1 Hardware settings on the HSS1

10.3.7.1.1 Dip switch S3


Common settings for tube 1 and tube 2

The DIP switches S3.1, S3.2, S3.7 and S3.8 are only for factory use. Other settings of
these switches can damage the tube.

S3 Function Factory default


S3.1 Braking of the tubes
on = enabled ON
off =disabled (only for factory use)
S3.2 Control of the intermediate circuit voltage UZK
on = enabled ON
off = disabled (only for factory use)
S3.3 Value of the intermediate circuit voltage
on = 600V (560Vac stator operating voltage) ON
off = 300V (230V ac stator operating voltage)
S3.4 Time of the continuous running of the tubes after exposure
ON

S3.4 S3.5 time


S3.5
OFF OFF 30s
OFF ON 15s OFF
ON OFF 20s
ON ON 500ms
S3.6 Not used
OFF

S3.7 Blocking of the 60Hz rotation frequency


on = blocked ON
off = enabled
S3.8 Removal of the start limitation
ON = no limitation OFF
OFF = limitation to 4 starts per minute

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-60
10.3.7.1.2 X3 wired jumper (UZK value selector)
Intermediate circuit voltage UZK can be set to 300VDC or 600VDC. The intermediate circuit voltage must be
selected according to the position of the dip switch S3.3.

Wire jumper X3 Description


1-2 Intermediate circuit voltage UZK = 300V (S3.3 = OFF)
2-3 Intermediate circuit voltage UZK = 600V (S3.3 = ON)

10.3.7.1.3 Jumper JP1, Potentiometer R44


The maximum stator current can be changed by the potentiometer R44. The factory value is 18A (TP6
1,8Vdc ≙ 18A).

Opened Converter current 18A (adjustable with R44) (factory default)


Closed Converter current max 6A (only for factory use)

10.3.7.1.4 Wired jumper for phase shift capacitor connection


The high speed starter for one tube is usually equipped with a 7μF motor run capacitor. The capacitor
consists of two 14μF capacitors connected in series and are mounted on the housing panel of the module.
The capacitor of tube one is connected to X11 and X14.
The high speed starter for two tubes is usually equipped with a 7μF motor run capacitor for both tubes. The
capacitor for tube two is connected to X23 and X20.
A change of this capacity may only be done by Spellman GmbH Bochum.

Standard version Option 1 version

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-61
10.3.7.2 Separate hardware settings for each tube

10.3.7.2.1 Dip switch S1 (tube1) and S2 (tube2) (separate settings for each tube)
The tube braking works using an AC current with a sloping frequency from 160Hz to 5Hz.
After a braking time between 3 to 6s the tube will rotate with less than 3000U/min. A deceleration to 0U/min.
is not possible.

The pulse width during the brake time may vary between 3ms to 10ms and can be set by the DIP switches
S1 for tube 1 and S2 for tube 2.

The brake time for each tube must be set in the generator setup.

The proper settings for different tube types are listed in the compatibility chart.

10.3.7.2.2 Function of the DIP switch S1 and S2


Functions are valid for both versions, Standard and Option 1

S1 S2 Function
Tube1 Tube2
S1.1 S2.1 Bit 0, Pulse width
S1.2 S2.2 Bit1, Pulse width
S1.3 S2.3 Bit 2, Pulse width
S1.4 S2.4 Not used
S1.5 S2.5 Bit 0, Start frequency of the high speed starter
S1.6 S2.6 Bit 1, Start frequency of the high speed starter
S1.7 S2.7 Bit 0, End frequency of the high speed starter
S1.8 S2.8 Bit 1, End frequency of the high speed starter

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-62
10.3.7.2.3 Settings of the pulse width during braking

S1 or S2 S1 or S2 S1 or S2 Standard version Option 1 version


Sx.1 Sx.2 Sx.3 Pulse width /ms Pulse width /ms
ON ON ON 3 1
OFF ON ON 3,5 1,5
ON OFF ON 4 2
OFF OFF ON 4,5 2,5
ON ON OFF 5 3
OFF ON OFF 6 3,5
ON OFF OFF 8 4
OFF OFF OFF 10 4,5

10.3.7.2.4 Settings of the start frequency of the high speed start

S1 or S2 S1 or S2 Standard version Option 1 version


Sx.5 Sx.6 Start frequency / Hz Start frequency / Hz
ON ON 120 140
OFF ON 130 150
ON OFF 140 166
OFF OFF 150 180

10.3.7.2.5 Settings of the end frequency of the high speed start after 1s
Values are valid for both versions, Standard and Option 1

S1 or S2 S1 or S2
Sx.7 Sx.8 End frequency / Hz
ON ON 160
OFF ON 166
ON OFF 174
OFF OFF 180

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-63
10.3.8 Software settings
The software settings must be changed after the hardware settings of the high-speed starter HSS1 are
completed for the connected tubes

These hardware settings include:

- Stator voltage
- Shift capacitor
- Start frequency of the high speed start
- End frequency of the high speed start
- Pulse width of the braking
- Timing of the continuous running

Next, the software settings in the generator service software must be set:

- Enable the high speed starter


- Communication channel and protocol settings
- Start time and brake time of the tube
- Anode data for high speed 150Hz

Use the service software to change the settings in the generator software. Use the data cable Ident-Nr.
06220244 for the connection between the board ZST2 and the service PC. All software settings are made on
the ZST2 of the generator.

Make a backup copy of the generator settings before changing the settings of the High-speed starter.

- Connect Service PC to the ZST2


- Switch on the generator
- Start the Service program
- Transfer the service date from the generator
Menu  Transfer  read all gen. Settings (Download 32kB)
- Save the settings of the AEC if present.
Menu  settings  AEC service Settings  „Read from AEC“ (Download 256B)
- Save all data
Menu  File  Save as

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-64
10.3.8.1 Device settings
The screenshot below shows the necessary settings for the high-speed starter device 26.
Menu  Settings  Device
Do the following settings:

- „Enable device“ has to be selected


- „Communication device“ = Starter
- „Channel“ = DISABLE
- „Communications baud rate“ and Stop bits have no effect
- In the field „Device Types“ set the „special“ setting to „Starter 9000“

Accept the changes by pressing the button „Accept”, then close the window using the „OK“ button.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-65
10.3.8.2 Tube settings
The start and brake time must be set in the settings of the tubes. The range of the anode start time is
1000ms –3000ms. The range of the anode break time is 0ms – 10000ms. A shorter brake time than 3000ms
is not recommended.
By using the check button “Anode high speed (150Hz)” it is possible to choose between the standard starter
of the EDITOR HFe for 3000rpm on the board NAG2 or the High-speed starter module. If the anode high-
speed 150Hz is disabled, the stator wire must be connected to the main distribution connector X6 for tube 1
or X9 for tube 2. In this case the high-speed starter gets no start signal from the board ZST2.
In the tube settings window for the values for anode start time, anode brake time, the timing of the interval
during continuous running and the power ratings must be set.
The tube Toshiba Type E7252X is shown as an example here
Menu  Settings  Tube x
Do the following settings:

- „Anode Start time“


Values between 1000 and 9000ms. Default 1500ms
- „Anode Brake time“
Values between 3000 and 10000ms.
- „Anode cycle on time“ ON time during preparation
Values between 30 and 100ms (see Chapter 9.3.8.2.2)
- „Anode cycle off time“OFF time during preparation
Values between 300 and 1000ms (see also chapter 9.3.8.2.2)
- „Anode high speed (150Hz)“
The power rating for 150Hz rotation is active.

Accept the changes by pressing the button „Accept“.

Set the power data of the anode in the window for the small focus using button „Focus 1“ and for the large
focus using button „Focus 2“

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-66
10.3.8.2.1 Tube settings for high speed rotation
If the check button „anode high speed 150Hz“ is selected, the generator will use the power ratings for 150Hz
rotation.

The power ratings must be in compliance with the original datasheet of the tube. The default settings set by
Spellman GmbH may vary from the ones of the used tube.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-67
10.3.8.2.2 Continuous running
The continuous running of the tube after exposure is controlled by the parameter “Anode cycle on time” and
“Anode cycle off time”.
During preparation the tube will be driven with low energy in small interval

For example:

Anode cycle on time = 50ms


Anode cycle off time = 500ms

During preparation the tube starts every 500ms lasting 50ms with the maximum frequency but with low pulse
width and low energy.

10.3.8.2.3 Multiple exposures during continuous running


If the user starts a second exposure during the tube is running on high speed, the high speed starter starts
the tube again for a short time depending on the time of the continuous running (15s, 20s, 30s, DIP switch
S3.4 and S3.5).

The time of the restart is a product of the parameter “Anode cycle on time” and a factor depending of the
continuous running time:

Continuous running time Factor


15s 3
20s 4
30s 6

For example:

Continuous running time = 15s


Anode cycle on time = 50ms
Factor = 3

Restart time of the tube = 50ms * 3 = 150ms

During the continuous running the tube will now restart for 150ms before starting the second exposure. The
restart works with the maximum frequency but with low pulse width and low energy.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-68
10.3.9 Error handling
The high-speed starter has an own hardware monitoring which will protect the connected tubes.
The hardware monitoring control the parameter in the idle mode and during the tube starts and brake. Each
hardware detected error will be displayed on the control desk with the message “E041: starter time out”. The
error LED on the PCB of the high-speed starter specifics the hardware error status.

10.3.9.1 Error Status LED


If the error message “E041 starter time out” appears on the display the 4 red Error-LED V9–V11 on the high-
speed starter shows the present error status.

Error No. LED Description


V11 V10 V9
1 OFF OFF ON Over-current in converter
2 OFF ON OFF Exposure not enabled
3 OFF ON ON Intermediate circuit voltage to low
4 ON OFF OFF Current in Standby mode

Switch of the generator before starting troubleshooting.

10.3.9.2 Error No. 1


The current of the inverter during an anode start or brake is too high. The comparator N9D on the HSS1
compare the current in the inverter with the over R44 adjustable value “ISOLL”. The default value of the
maximum current ISOLL is 18A. The voltage on TP6 is set to 1,8V. (18A ≙ 1,8V at TP6).

Possible causes:

- The hardware settings do not comply with the connected tube. Check the documentation of the tube
stator.
o Check all hardware settings on the high-speed starter.

- Control the stator connections and the used stator cable


o Measure the resistance of the stator windings at the tube side
example:
On the tube side Resistance
Main phase – common (W – V) 20 Ohm
Shift phase – common (U – V) 50 Ohm
Main phase – Shift phase (W – U) 70 Ohm

o Measure the resistance of the stator windings at the cable side at the connector to the high
speed starter
example:
On the cable side at the connector Resistance
W – V (between Pin 2 and 3) 21 Ohm
U – V (between Pin 1 and 3) 51 Ohm
U – W (between Pin 1 and 2) 72 Ohm

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-69
- The specifications of the stator cable are incorrect.
o Change the stator cable

- The error appears only during tube braking:


o Reduce the pulse width of the braking pulses if the error only appears during the braking of
the anode

- The voltage on TP6 is too low.


o Increase the value, Maximum is 1,8V

- Jumper JP1 is closed (only closed during electric tests in the factory)

- Broken IGBT on the High-speed starter. Change the module.

10.3.9.3 Error No. 2


The HSS1 controls the current in the Main and Shift wire of the stator cable. If the current is too low or there
is no current in one of these wires this error is set.

Possible causes:

- Wrong connected stator cable


o See Error 1 and measure the impedance

- Broken stator cable


o Change the cable. Never repair the broken cable.

- Tube with high stator impedance. Unknown tube and stator type
o Confer with Spellman GmbH Bochum

- Tubes have a thermo contact inside of the stator windings which open the stator at a temperature
above 70°C.
o Wait until the tube is cooled down.
o The most tube manufacturers allow only 2 high-speed starts per minute.

10.3.9.4 Error No. 3


If the intermediate circuit voltage is too low during the start or the brake time this error is set. Also if the
intermediate circuit voltage is too low during idle mode this error is set

Possible causes:
- The hardware settings of the stator voltage are incorrect.
o Control the settings of DIP switch S3.3 and the wire junction on connector X16.

- Broken rectifier on the HSS1.


o Change the complete module

10.3.9.5 Error No. 4


A current is measured during the inactive time (idle mode) of the HSS1.

Possible causes:
- Broken IGBT in the inverter of the HSS1
o Change the complete module

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-70
10.4 BA6: Automatic exposure control (analog)

10.4.1 Hardware and Software Configuration

10.4.1.1 Compatible Measuring Chambers

10.4.1.1.1 Type A
- Measuring chamber type A: non-integrating preamplifier (VV20 or VV21):

Manufacturer Measuring chamber Spellman Ident-


Nr
VACUTEC BAK70 147 / 147 00 01 6880 0015
VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 145 00 15 6880 0012
Various Semiconductor chamber -------------

Attention: For a semiconductor measuring chamber a preamplifier VV21 is required. The


type of chamber remains the same A.

10.4.1.1.2 Type B
- Measuring chamber type B: integrating preamplifier:

Manufacturer Measuring chamber Spellman Ident-


Nr
Philips 9890 - 000 - 01612 6880 0016
VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 145 00 42 6880 0020
VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 145 00 43 6880 0021

10.4.1.1.3 Type C
- Measuring chamber type C: integrating preamplifier.
- This chamber use low active control signals.

Manufacturer Measuring chamber


VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 145 00 4

Attention: This chamber has a pin assignment other than VACUTEC chambers of type B.
The Spellman measuring chamber cables doesn’t work with this chamber!

10.4.1.1.4 Type D
- Measuring chamber type D: non-integrating preamplifier without adjustment of the amplification
by field-combination.

Manufacturer Measuring chamber


Philips Several models
Siemens Several models

Attention: This chamber has a pin assignment other than VACUTEC chambers of type B.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-71
Up to 4 measuring chambers may be connected to the AEC using 9-pin D-SUB (male) plugs.

It is not possible to mix the types of measuring chambers. 

10.4.1.2 Jumper settings for Measuring Chamber VACUTEC BAK70145 / 14500 42,
43,04

For this measuring chamber it is important to set the measuring signal to a positive gradient. Therefore
make sure that jumper S4 on the measuring chamber is set to ON. 

- Positive measuring signal


Function S4
Measuring signal with positive gradient ON

- Amplification
Amplification S1 S2 S3
0,1V/µGy (10V=100µGy) OFF OFF OFF
0,5V/µGy (10V=20µGy) ON OFF OFF default
1V/µGy (10V=10µGy) OFF ON OFF
2V/µGy (10V=5µGy) OFF OFF ON

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-72
10.4.1.3 Pin Assignment on BA6
Table shows the pin assignment of the 9-pole connector X1 to X4 to connect the measuring chambers to the
AEC.
Table shows the special cable pin assignment for the chamber type C

Pin Type A (with VV20 or Type B


VV21)
1 0V 0V for amplifier
2 signal measuring field III Select right-hand field III (high active)
3 signal measuring field II Select left-hand field II (high active)
4 +15V +15V, internal amplifier operating voltage
5 0V measuring signal of chamber
6 0V reset (high active)
7 signal measuring field I Select central field I (high active)
8 -15V -15V, internal amplifier operating voltage
9 chamber voltage 300V chamber voltage 400V (Philips chamber)
or not used (Vacutec chamber 70145/1450042/..43)
Cover shielding shielding
Table 9-1: Pin assignment connector measuring chamber-AEC, 9-pole D-SUB

Pin Type C Pin


BA6 side chamber side
1 0V for amplifier 9
2 Select right-hand field III (low active) 6
3 Select left-hand field II (low active) 2
4 +15V, internal amplifier operating voltage 8
5 measuring signal of chamber 5
6 reset (low active) 4
7 Select central field I (low active) 3
8 -15V, internal amplifier operating voltage 7
9 not used
Cover shielding
Table 9-2: Pin assignment connection cable chamber type C, 9-pole D-SUB

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-73
10.4.1.4 Jumper Settings on BA6
Depending on the type of measuring chamber jumpers on the printed circuit board BA6 must be set
according to Table .

Jumper Type A Type B Type C Type D Function


Ionisation- or Ionisation Ionisation Ionisation
Semiconductor
Chamber Chamber Chamber Chamber
with VV20 or VV21
pre-amplifier
Spellman
Default

X20 Closed Open Open Open Dose signal


Closed = proportional signal
X28 must be opened
X28 Open Closed Closed Open Dose rate signal
Closed = integrated signal
X20 must be opened
X22 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 2-3 = with START Signal
1-2 = GND
X7 Closed Open Open Closed Chamber Voltage
Open = 400VDC
Closed = 300VDC
X17 Closed Open Open Open Chamber 4
Opened = Input, Signal chamber 4
Closed = GND
X19 Closed Open Open Open Chamber 3
Open = Input, Signal
chamber 3
Closed = GND
X27 Closed Open Open Open Chamber 2
Open = Input, Signal
chamber 2
Closed = GND
X29 Closed Open Open Open Chamber 1
Open = Input, Signal
chamber 1
Closed = GND
X16 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 4
1-2 = Input MFR (right field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFR
X5 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 4
1-2 = Input MFM (centre field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFM
X6 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 4
1-2 = Input MFL (left field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFL
X8 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 3
1-2 = Input MFR (right field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFR
X9 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 3
1-2 = Input MFM (centre field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFM
X10 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 3
1-2 = Input MFL (left field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFL
X12 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 2
1-2 = Input MFR (right field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFR

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-74
Jumper Type A Type B Type C Type D Function
Ionisation- or Ionisation Ionisation Ionisation
Semiconductor
Chamber Chamber Chamber Chamber
with VV20 or VV21
pre-amplifier
X13 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 2
1-2 = Input MFM (centre field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFM
X14 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 2
1-2 = Input MFL (left field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFL
X18 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 1
1-2 = Input MFR (right field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFR
X26 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 1
1-2 = Input MFM (centre field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFM
X21 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 Chamber 1
1-2 = Input MFL (left field)
2-3 = Output Control Signal MFL
X11 without function Closed Closed Closed Gain Amplifier N16
Open = 2:1
Closed = 1:1

X23 Closed Closed Closed Open R54,R55 Offset N4


Open = No Offset
Closed = Offset
X25 Closed without Closed Closed Closed = Inverter N4 active !
function

X30 Open Open Open 2-3 Open = default


1-2 = Inverter N4 active with N16
2-3 = Inverter N4 active with N14
X31 Open Open Open Closed Open = default
Closed = Siemens Ionisations
chamber with Siemens preamplifier
(orange green)

X32 VV20 closed Philips: Open Closed Chamber Voltage ON / OFF


closed Open = Voltage disable ,OFF
VV21 opened
If the jumper is open the
Vacutec: BA6 generate the error
open “300V faulty” (LED V33
and V34 blinking) but this
does not affect the
functionality of the BA6.
Closed = Voltage enable, ON
X33 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 Interface CAN–BUS / RS232
1-2 = CAN_H active, CAN-BUS
2-3 = T_RS1 active, RS232
X34 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 Interface CAN-BUS / RS232
1-2 = CAN_L active, CAN-BUS
2-3 = R_RS1 active, RS232
X35 Open Open Open Open Open = CAN-BUS not terminated
Closed = CAN-BUS terminated
X36 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2 1-2 = High active control signal
2-3 = Low active control signal
X38 1-2 1-2 2-3 1-2 LOA6\ - START Signal
1-2 = START signal high active

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-75
Jumper Type A Type B Type C Type D Function
Ionisation- or Ionisation Ionisation Ionisation
Semiconductor
Chamber Chamber Chamber Chamber
with VV20 or VV21
pre-amplifier
2-3 = START signal low active
X39 2-3 2-3 1-2 2-3 LOA6\ - START Signal
1-2 = START signal low active
2-3 = START signal high active

Table 9-3: Jumper settings on BA6

10.4.1.5 Jumper settings on ZST2


The jumper X1 on the PCB ZST2 must be open to use the AEC BA6.

10.4.1.6 Software Parameters for BA6


Make sure that the parameters to activate the BA6 are set properly according to the following table.

Code Nr. Parameter


640 AEC enable
410 Device 0 (on desk) 0 = AEC disabled
1 = AEC enabled (chamber with 1 field)
430 Device 1
3 = AEC enabled (chamber with 3 field)
460 Device 2
411 Device 0 AEC chamber (on desk)
431 Device 1 AEC chamber AEC channel X1 – X4
461 Device 2 AEC chamber
Table 9-4: Software parameters for BA6

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-76
10.4.2 Preparation for Adjustment

10.4.2.1 Required Equipment

Phantom 1: Aluminium block, 100 cm², 25 mm thickness; placed at collimator


Phantom 2: Water, 100 mm thickness; placed in patient's position
Phantom 3: Water, 50 mm thickness; placed in patient's position
Phantom 4: Copper plate, 100 cm², 1 mm thickness; placed at collimator

Densitometer, Dosimeter

10.4.2.2 Measurement Set-up

1. Arrange film-focus distance to approximately 1 m.


2. Set collimator to film format (e.g. 18 x 24 cm²).
3. Mount AL-Phantom (1) to the collimator.
4. Place the measuring chamber of the dosimeter instead of the film.
5. Connect the AEC measuring chamber to the generator.

Figure 9-7 shows the measurement set-up to adjust the AEC using a dosimeter.

Dosimeter Meßkammer / Chamber Dosemeter


BA - Meßkammer / AEC - Measuring chamber
Raster / Grid
Lagerungsplatte / Table top Tiefenblende / Collimator
Röhre / X-Ray tube

Phantom 4, 1mm Cu
Phantom 1, 25 mm Al
Phantom 3, 50 mm Wasser
Phantom 2, 100 mm Wasser
Meßsignal
Belichtungsautomat
Measuring signal AEC

Dosisimeter Steuerpult Röntgengenerator


dosemeter control desk X-ray generator
0522 8877

Figure 9-7: Measurement set-up to adjust the AEC.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-77
10.4.2.3 Adjustment mode

To adjust the AEC use the service mode of the AEC. To set this mode follow this procedure:

1. Switch the Generator off.


2. Put the service connector instead of the hand switch.

3. Switch the generator on and press the key at the same time.

4. input the “key code” in code number 300 (default is 0000)

5. press M to store the value

6. Input parameter 999

7. press M to store the value


8. In the display appears the message

AEC SETUP VX.XX

9. To leave the AEC-Setup press and afterwards the key

The next steps are selected in a menu.

Scroll through the menu by using down and up .

The main menu consists of 10 steps

item function
1 AEC-CHAMBER 1 adjustment of measuring chamber 1
2 AEC-CHAMBER 2 adjustment of measuring chamber 2
3 AEC-CHAMBER 3 adjustment of measuring chamber 3
4 AEC-CHAMBER 4 adjustment of measuring chamber 4
5 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 0,

6 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 1 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 1

7 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 2 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 2,

8 DOSE TEST AFTER 50mS activating dose test

9 START PHASE CORRECTION Correction factor for short exposure times, measuring chamber with
external preamplifier

10 SAVE AEC SETUP save all parameters


Table 9-5: Main menu adjustment of AEC.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-78
Press M to select the menu. Either a context menu is activated or a value has to be set.

10.4.2.4 Adjustment of the measuring chamber


Adjustment of the 4 measuring chambers follows the same routine. This chapter describes the adjustment of
chamber 1 in detail. Each step must be repeated for each chamber.

1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" by pressing followed by pressing M

The message AEC-CHAMBER 1, SCREEN 0(1-80):045 is displayed. The values in brackets designate the
parameter range.

Context menu 1 is activated. Press button to scroll through the menu.

item function
1 SCREEN 0 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 0, e.g. 400 FFS
2 SCREEN 1 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 1, e.g. 800 FFS
3 SCREEN 2 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 2, e.g. 200 FFS
4 FIELD CORR. R(0-15): correction of right hand measuring field
5 FIELD CORR. L(0-15): correction of left hand measuring field
6 FIELD SWAP(0,1): Orientation of the measuring fields with respect to the X-ray beam
direction
7 PULSED EXP. (0,1): 1 = pulsed exposure
0 = single exposure
8 INTEGR. CH(0,1) 1 = measuring chamber type B, C
0 = measuring chamber type A, D
9 GRAYLEVEL (1-7) fine adjustment in 1/8 exposure points (7=+3/8, 4= normal, 1= -3/8)
Table 9-6: Context menu: adjustment of measuring chamber.

Important:

In the first place the type of the measuring chamber must be set in menu "INTEGR. CH(0,1)", because
otherwise all adjustment steps would lead to malfunction of the AEC. 

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-79
10.4.2.4.1 Select Type of Chamber

M
1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" with and press .

2. Select "INTEGR. CH (0,1):" with .


3. Set parameter value:
0 = Measuring chamber type A (with VV20 or VV21)
1 = Measuring chamber type B

4. Quit menu with .


M
5. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
6. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.4.2.4.2 Adjustment of the measuring chamber

Now the measuring chamber must be adjusted.

1. Select menu item "AEC-CHAMBER 1" using and press M

Message AEC-CHAMBER 1, SCREEN 0(1-80):045 is displayed. Values in brackets define the parameter
range.

2. Set exposure parameters: 2-point-technique, 80kV, 100mAs, large focus.


3. Set density correction to 0.
4. The choice of the film-screen-system has no effect on the adjustment.
5. Select the central measuring field by pressing

6. Select "SCREEN 0 (1-80): " (standard film-screen-system) via respectively.

!!! CAUTION !!!

Ionising Radiation is produced.


Take care to radiation protection.
Wear radiation protection clothes (if necessary).
Take exposures from the protected area only.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-80
10.4.2.5 Preadjustment by measuring the Dose
1. Take an exposure, the AEC will terminate the exposure.
2. Log the measured dose.
Depending on the film-screen-system FSS the dose D should reach the values listed in the table below.
These values are valid for exposures taken without water phantom.

FSS 25 50 100 200 400 800


D [µGy] 40,00 20,00 10,00 5,00 2,50 1,25
Table 9-7: Expected dose to achieve best images, depending on the film-screen-system.
If the measured dose differs from the value given in the table, the sensitivity of the AEC must be
adjusted. If the measured dose is greater than the one given in the table, decrease the parameter
value. If the measured dose is smaller than that given in the table increase the parameter value.
Changing the value by 1 corresponds to 0.5 exposure points. The parameter value may be changed by
cm cm
using the buttons and or may be entered directly by using the numerical buttons. Leading
zeros must also be entered.

If the measured dose founded in menu item “SCREEN X (1-80) differs from the value given in the table,
the AEC must be fine adjusted in the menu item “GRAYLEVEL (1-7)”.
The default parameter value 4 is normal (+/- 0/8 exposure points). 7 means +3/8 exposure points from
the value you founded under AEC-CHAMBER X, SCREEN 0(1-80):...) and 1 means –3/8 exposure
points.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the measured dose complies with the values listed in the table.
4. Remove the measuring chamber of the dosimeter.

10.4.2.6 Fine Adjustment by measuring Film Density


1. Place a cassette with the selected film-screen-system and the corresponding film into the bucky.
2. Take an exposure.
3. Process the film.
4. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
5. If the density does not lie within the interval, correct the parameter value by using buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 until density fits into the interval.
7. Replace again the film tray by the dosemeter chamber.
8. Take an exposure and log the measured value and the parameter value in the AEC's record.

9. Quit the menu by pressing


M
10. Use to select menu "SAVE AEC SETUP" and press .
The display shows the message: SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M':

M
11. To store the parameters press again.
After successfully storing the parameter values AEC SETUP DATA SAVED is displayed

Repeat the whole procedure for film-screen-system 1 and 2 (SCREEN1, SCREEN2), if provided.

10.4.2.7 Beam quality


1. Place Phantom 4 (1 mm Cu) additionally in front of the collimator.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-81
2. Take an exposure using the X-ray parameters 80kV, 100mAs, large focus.
3. Process the film and measure the film density.
Density must not differ more than 25% of the value without CU-phantom. In the case the deviation is
higher additional filtering must be installed at the tube.
The additional filtering, tube and collimator, must be higher than >= 2,5mm AL.

10.4.2.8 Correction of measuring fields


Take three exposures using right, left or centre field film density or measured dose may deviate if the values
are compared from right hand field to central field and left-hand field to central field. If this deviation exceeds
10% of the value found if using the central field, a correction should be done.
Taking the value of 07 as default (no correction will be done) changing the parameter value by ±1
corresponds to a change in exposure points of ±0,5.

1. Put either the dosemeter measuring chamber or a cassette with film into the bucky.
2. Select the central measuring field only.
3. Set X-ray parameters to 1-point technique, 80 kV.
4. Take an exposure.
5. Log the measured dose or the density, respectively.

6. Select "FIELD CORR. L(0-15)" with .


7. Select left hand measuring field only.
8. Take an exposure.
9. If the measured value deviates by more than ±10% from the one found in step 5, correct the parameter
cm cm
using and or enter the value directly.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until deviation is <10%.

11. Select "FIELD CORR. R(0-15)" using .


12. Select right hand field only.
13. Repeat steps 8. and 9. until deviation is <10%.

14. Quit the menu by pressing .


M
15. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
16. The display shows the message: SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M':
M
17. Press again to save the values.
The message AEC SETUP DATA SAVED appears in the display.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-82
10.4.2.9 Swapping measuring Fields according to spatial Orientation
Depending on the application it may be necessary to swap the measuring fields for every measuring
chamber using the "FIELD SWAP(0,1):" menu. Figure and Figure show the physical orientation of the two
used chambers.

II III

1
3 linkes Meßfeld
linkes Meßfeld rechtes Meßfeld
left-hand field rechtes Meßfeld left-hand field
right-hand field right-hand field

2 Fußende
mittleres Meßfeld foot end mittleres Meßfeld
central field central field

Figure 9-8: PHILIPS measuring chamber, Orientation Figure 9-9: VACUTEC measuring chamber, Orientation
of the measuring fields in the direction of of the measuring fields in the direction of
the beam the beam

Set the parameter as follows:

measuring
chamber orientation parameter "FIELD SWAP (0,1):"
field
left 1
0
right 3
PHILIPS
left 3
1
right 1
left II
0
right III
VACUTEC
left III
1
right II
Table 9-8: Spatial orientation and measuring fields

M
1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" by and press .
2. Select context menu "FIELD SWAP(0,1):".
3. Set parameters according to Table .

4. Quit menu by pressing .


M
5. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
6. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-83
10.4.2.10 Pulsed Exposure Settings

M
1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" with and press .

2. Select "PULSED EXP. (0,1):" with .


3. Set parameter value:
0 = single shots
1 = pulsed Exposure

4. Quit menu with .


M
5. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
6. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

To adjust the next measuring chamber repeat all steps of chapter 9.4.2.4.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-84
10.4.3 kV-Compensation

For each film-screen-system film density depends on tube voltage in a different way. This influence must be
compensated to get sufficient images. Compensation is done in the menu "KV COMPENS., SCREEN n" for
a tube voltage from 40 kV to 150 kV using 8 steps. Please keep in mind the minimum and maximum values
for tube voltage which has been set during installation.

The compensation is given in % of the parameter set at 80 kV. This implies automatically that the value set
at 80 kV must be 100%.

Set the parameters for tube voltages below and above 80 kV according to the procedure described below.

10.4.3.1 Preparations
1. Remove the AL- and CU-phantoms off the beam.
2. Place the phantoms 2 and 3 (100 mm water, 50 mm water) in patient's position.
3. Select 1-point-technique.
4. Select central measuring field.
5. Select standard film-screen-system.
M
6. Select menu "KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0" using and press .

The display shows: KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0, 40KV(1-250%):

Note:
It is recommended to start the procedure at 80 kV. The parameter value is assumed to be 100 because all
previous adjustments were done at 80 kV.

If films are available, skip chapter 9.4.3.2, because there is a non-linear dependence of tube voltage, dose
and film density. 
At 40 kV you may get many faulty exposures. In this case it is recommended to extrapolate the values
instead of doing measurements.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-85
10.4.3.2 Preadjustment using Dose Measurements
1. Place the measuring chamber of the dosimeter instead of the film.

2. Select the voltage using buttons and


3. Set the voltage at the control desk. 1-point technique , select central measurement field
4. Take an exposure, the AEC should terminate the exposure.
5. The measured dose should fit to the values listed in Table .
cm cm
6. Correct deviations by changing the value with the buttons and or enter the value directly.
7. Repeat steps 4. to 6. until the measured dose fits the value of the table.

8. Select the next voltage step using .


9. Repeat steps 2. to 8. for each voltage.
10. Remove the measuring chamber of the dosimeter.

10.4.3.3 Fine Adjustment measuring Film density


1. Insert a cassette with the selected film-screen-system and corresponding film.

2. Select the voltage step using buttons and


3. Set the voltage at the control desk. 1-point technique , select central measurement field.
4. Take an exposure, the AEC should terminate the exposure.
5. Process the film.
6. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
7. If the density does not lie within this interval, correct the parameter value by using buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 until density fits into the interval.
9. Replace the cassette by the measuring chamber of the dosimeter.
10. Take an exposure and log the measured dose value and the parameter value
(kV-Compensation in %) in the AEC's record.

11. Select the next voltage step using .


12. Set the voltage at the control desk. 1-point technique , select central measurement field
13. Repeat steps 2 to 12 for all voltage steps.

14. Quit menu with .


M
15. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
16. Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed
M
17. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

Repeat the steps of this chapter for film-screen-systems 1 and 2 (SCREEN 1, SCREEN2).

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-86
10.4.3.4 Safety Termination
If a preset fraction between 1% and 50% of the dose is not achieved within 50 ms, the AEC terminates the
exposure immediately. If this parameter is set to 00, the safety termination is disabled.

M
1. Select "DOSE TEST AFTER 50MS" using and press .
2. Set parameter to a value between 1% (01) and 50% (50).

3. Quit menu with .


M
4. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed
M
5. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.4.3.5 Startphase

In case of very short exposure times, the quality of the images may not be sufficient, especially when using
measuring chambers with external preamplifiers. If this happens a correction factor may be set to
compensate effects at the beginning of the exposure in the menu START PHASE CORRECTION.

M
1. Select "START PHASE CORRECTION" using and press .
2. Set exposure parameters at the control desk: 3-point-technique, 80 kV, 5 ms.
3. Select central measurement field.
4. Insert the film, take an exposure and process the film.
5. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
6. If the density does not lie within this interval correct the parameter value by using buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 until density fits into the interval.

8. Quit menu with .


M
9. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed
M
10. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.4.3.6 Store Settings

1. Quit menu with .


M
2. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-87
M
3. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.4.3.7 Setting normal Mode

If all necessary steps are done to adjust the measuring chambers, the generator is set back to normal
operation mode.

1. Switch of the generator.


2. Disconnect the service connector from the control desk and reconnect the hand switch .
3. Switch on the generator.

The generator starts the WARM UP and is ready for normal operation.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-88
10.4.4 Error Messages

10.4.4.1 Error messages on the control panel

In case errors occur during operation the messages "E034" to "E038" are displayed .

Display Explanation Reason Cause


E034 Exposure too long termination because max. collimator is closed, exposure
allowed exposure time was parameters (kV) too small
reached
E035 Exposure too short exposure time <2ms Dose too high
E036 Exposure terminated The exposure has been e.g. user released exposure button,
interrupted for an external door to examination room has been
reason opened, dose too low, exposure
parameters in 2- (mAs) or 3-point
technique (ms) are chosen to be
too small ...
E037 Dose too small Safety termination at the collimator is closed, exposure
beginning of an exposure parameters (kV) too small, not
measuring anything
E038 delay between two series of exposures has
exposures to large been terminated
Table 9-9: Error codes displayed on the control panel

10.4.4.2 Status indication and error messages on the BA6

The status of the AEC is indicated by the LEDs V33-V35 and V57 on the BA6 board. Also hardware errors
are shown on the automatic exposure control board.

No. V57 V35 V34 V33 Beschreibung


1 o exposure to long (>3s)

2 o exposure to short (<3ms)

3 o o exposure cancelled by user or by EDITOR

4 o Dosis insuffizient after 60ms

5 o o cancelled serial exposure (>3s)

6 o o ROM checksum faulty

7 o o o RAM test faulty

8 o No error, exposure ends correct

9 o o power supply +5V faulty

10 o o power supply ± 15V faulty

11 o o o power supply 300/400 V faulty

12 o o offset (5 / 10 mV) error

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-89
13 o o o E2PROM checksum faulty

14 o o o Watch dog

15 o o o o not used

Table 9-10: Error messages indicated by LEDs on the BA6 (Binary Coding).

Remaining LEDs
V49 V50
Serial datex BA6 – EDITOR
* * for CAN Bus Interface the LEDs are not used.
V53 V54
* * Serial datex BA6 – extern interface for service

V111 ° - 15V OK

V110 ° + 15V OK

V48 ° + 5V OK

V37 ° NOT signal

V36 ° BUS signal

V38 ° LOA6 signal

* = flashing LED, ° = LED continuously on

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-90
10.4.5 Overview BA6

Measuring chamber 1

Measuring chamber 2

Measuring chamber 3

Measuring chamber 4

Figure 9-10: Connecting the measuring chambers

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-91
10.4.5.1 Jumper settings camber type A

Jumper X32
VV20 - closed - 300V activated
VV21 - opened - 300V deactivated

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-92
10.4.5.2 Jumper settings camber type B

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-93
10.4.5.3 Jumper settings chamber type C

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-94
10.4.5.4 Jumper settings chamber type D

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-95
10.5 BA7: Automatic Exposure Control (digital)

10.5.1 Hardware and Software Configuration

10.5.1.1 Compatible Measuring Chambers

Manufacturer Measuring chamber Spellman Ident-Nr


VACUTEC BAK70145,1450045 68800026
VACUTEC BAK70139 *(only BA7 type B)

Up to 5 measuring chambers may be connected to the AEC using RJ45 patch cable (BA7 type A).
*Up to two 5-field chambers (BAK70139) may be connected to the BA7 type B using a 15-pole sub-D
connector.

10.5.1.2 Jumper settings at Measuring Chamber VACUTEC BAK70 145 / 1450045 /


70139

- Amplification
Amplification S1 S2 S3 S4
100 pulses = 100µGy OFF OFF OFF OFF
100 pulses = 20µGy OFF OFF OFF ON
100 pulses = 10µGy OFF OFF ON OFF
100 pulses = 5µGy OFF ON OFF OFF
100 pulses = 2,5µGy ON OFF OFF OFF default

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-96
10.5.1.3 Pin Assignment on BA7
Table shows the pin assignment of the 8-pole RJ45 connectors X1 to X5 to connect the measuring chamber
to the AEC. *Table shows the pin assignment of the two 15-pole sub-D connectors X4 and X5 on the BA7
type B (to connect the 5-field chamber).

Pin
1 0V
2 +15V
3 signal pulses RS485 A
4 right-hand field selection
5 Chamber select / Start
6 signal pulses RS485 B
7 left-hand field selection
8 central field selection
Cover shielding
Table 9-11: Pin assignment AEC measuring chamber connector, 8-pole RJ45

Pin
1 RS422-A
2 Enable left measuring field, low active
3 Enable center measuring field, low active
4 Reset / run, low active
5 RS422-B
6 Enable right measuring field, low active
7 Not used
8 Supply voltage (+11.5...16V)
9 GND
10 Supply voltage (+11.5...16V)
11 Portrait, low active
12 GND
13 Inverted, low active
14 Supply voltage (+11.5...16V)
15 GND
Cover shielding
Table 9-12: Pin assignment AEC measuring chamber connector, 15-pole sub-D

10.5.1.4 Jumper Settings on BA7


Depending on the type of communication port to the generator jumpers on the printed circuit board BA7 must
be set according to Table .

Jumper
X33 1-2 CAN BUS

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-97
Jumper
2-3 RS232
X34 1-2 CAN BUS
2-3 RS232
X35 Open CAN BUS not terminated(default)
closed CAN BUS terminated
Table 9-13: Jumper settings on BA7

10.5.1.5 Jumper settings on ZST2


The jumper X1 on the PCB ZST2 must be open to use the AEC BA7.

10.5.1.6 Software Parameters for BA7


Make sure that the parameters to activate the BA7 are set properly according to the following description.
The AEC device has to be enabled and in the "special" field AEC has to be selected:

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-98
In the "X-ray device settings" dialog the input fields "AEC fields enabled(0,1,3,51-54)" and "AEC chamber"
have to be set according to Table and Table .

Input field Setting


AEC fields enabled(0,1,3,51-54) 0 = AEC disabled
1 = AEC enabled (chamber with 1 field)
3 = AEC enabled (chamber with 3 fields)
51 = AEC enabled (chamber with 5 fields according to Table )*
52 = AEC enabled (chamber with 5 fields according to Table )*
53 = AEC enabled (chamber with 5 fields according to Table )*
54 = AEC enabled (chamber with 5 fields according to Table )*
AEC channel X1 – X5
AEC chamber

5-field chambers may only be connected to X4 or X5.*


Table 9-14: Software parameters for BA7 (*only selectable using BA7 type B)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-99
Setting Signals Enabled fields
Code Portrait Inverted Left Centre Right
51 0 1 1 2 3
52 1 1 3 2 5
53 0 0 5 2 4
54 1 0 4 2 1
Table 9-15: BA7 type B field selection.

Figure 9-11: 5-field chamber field layout.

10.5.2 Preparation for Adjustment

10.5.2.1 Required Equipment

Phantom 1: Aluminium block, 100 cm², 25 mm thickness; placed in front of the collimator
Phantom 2: Water, 100 mm thickness; placed in patient's position
Phantom 3: Water, 50 mm thickness; placed in patient's position
Phantom 4: Copper plate, 100 cm², 1 mm thickness; placed in front of the collimator

Densitometer, dosemeter

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-100
10.5.2.2 Measurement Set-up

1. Arrange the film-focus distance to approximately 1 m.


2. Set collimator to the film format (e.g. 18 x 24 cm²).
3. Mount AL-Phantom (1) to the collimator.
4. Place the measuring detector of the dosemeter instead of the film.
5. Connect the AEC measuring chamber to the generator.

Figure shows the measurement set-up to adjust the AEC using a dosemeter.

Dosimeter Meßkammer / Dosemeter detector


BA - Meßkammer / AEC - Measuring chamber
Raster / Grid
Lagerungsplatte / Table top Tiefenblende / Collimator
Röhre / X-Ray tube

Phantom 4, 1mm Cu
Phantom 1, 25 mm Al
Phantom 3, 50 mm Wasser
Phantom 2, 100 mm Wasser
Meßsignal Belichtungsautomat
Measuring signal AEC

Dosisimeter Steuerpult Röntgengenerator


dosemeter control panel X-ray generator
0522 8877

Figure 9-12: Measurement set-up to adjust the AEC.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-101
10.5.2.3 Adjustment mode

To adjust the AEC use the service mode of the AEC. To set this mode follow the procedure:

1. Switch the generator off.


2. Put the service connector instead of the hand switch.

3. Switch the generator on and press the key at the same time.
4. enter the “key code” in code number 300 (default is 0000)

5. press M to store the value


6. Select parameter 999

7. press M to store the value


8. On the display appears the message

AEC SETUP VX.XX

9. To leave the AEC-Setup press and afterwards the key

The next steps are selected in a menu.


Scroll through the menu by and
.
using up down

The main menu consists of 10 items

Item function
1 AEC-CHAMBER 1 adjustment of measuring chamber 1
2 AEC-CHAMBER 2 adjustment of measuring chamber 2
3 AEC-CHAMBER 3 adjustment of measuring chamber 3
4 AEC-CHAMBER 4 adjustment of measuring chamber 4
5 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 0,

6 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 1 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 1

7 KV COMPENS., SCREEN 2 kV-compensation for film-screen-system 2,

8 DOSE TEST AFTER 50MS activating dose test

9 START PHASE CORRECTION Correction factor for short exposure times, measuring chamber with
external preamplifier

10 SAVE AEC SETUP save all parameters


Table 9-16: Main menu adjustment of AEC.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-102
M
Press to select the menu. By pressing this button either a context menu is selected or a value can
be set.

10.5.2.3.1 Adjustment of the measuring chamber


Adjustment of the 4 measuring chambers follows up the same routine. This chapter describes the adjustment
of chamber 1 in detail. Each step must be repeated for each chamber.

2. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" by pressing followed by pressing M

The message AEC-CHAMBER 1, SCREEN 0(1-80):045 is displayed. The values in brackets define the
parameter range.

Context menu 1 is activated. Press button to scroll through the menu.

Item function
1 SCREEN 0 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 0, e.g. 400 FFS
2 SCREEN 1 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 1, e.g. 800 FFS
3 SCREEN 2 (1-80): adjustment of film-screen- system 2, e.g. 200 FFS
4 FIELD CORR. R(0-15): correction of right hand measuring field, *not to be used for 5-field chambers
5 FIELD CORR. L(0-15): correction of left hand measuring field, *not to be used for 5-field chambers
6 FIELD SWAP(0,1): Orientation of the measuring fields according to X-ray beam direction
7 PULSED EXP. (0,1): 1 = pulsed exposure
0 = single exposure
8 INTEGR. CH(0,1) 0 or 1 not used with BA7

9 GRAYLEVEL (1-7) fine adjustment in 1/8 exposure points (7=+3/8, 4= normal, 1= -3/8)
Table 9-17: Context menu: adjustment of measuring chamber.

10.5.2.4 Select Type of Chamber (not used for BA7)

This parameter is not used.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-103
10.5.2.5 Adjustment of the measuring chamber

Now the measuring chamber must be adjusted.

1. Select menu item "AEC-CHAMBER 1" using and press M

The message AEC-CHAMBER 1, SCREEN 0(1-80):045 is displayed. Values in brackets define the range of
the parameter.

1. Set exposure parameters: 2-point-technique, 80kV, 100mAs, large focus.


2. Set density correction to 0.
3. The choice of the film-screen-system has no effect on the adjustment.
4. Select the central measuring field by pressing

5. Select "SCREEN 0 (1-80): " (standard film-screen-system) via respectively.

!!! CAUTION !!!


Ionising Radiation is produced.
Pay attention to radiation protection.
Wear radiation protection clothes (if necessary).
Take exposures from the protected area only.

10.5.2.5.1 Pre-adjustment by measuring the dose


1. Take an exposure, the AEC will terminate the exposure.
2. Log the measured dose.
Depending on the film-screen-system FSS the dose D should reach the values listed in the table below.
These values are valid for exposures taken without using the water phantom.

FSS 25 50 100 200 400 800


D [µGy] 40,00 20,00 10,00 5,00 2,50 1,25
Table 9-18: Expected dose to achieve best images, depending on the film-screen-system.
If the measured dose differs from the values given in the table, the sensitivity of the AEC must be
adjusted. If the measured dose is larger than the one given in the table, decrease the parameter value.
If the measured dose is smaller than the one given in the table increase the parameter value.
Changing the value by 1 corresponds to 0.5 exposure points. The parameter value may be changed by
cm cm
using the buttons and or may be entered directly by using the numerical buttons. Leading
zeros have to be entered as well.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-104
If the measured dose selected in the menu item “SCREEN X (1-80) differs from the value given in the
table, the AEC has to be finely adjusted in the menu item “GRAYLEVEL (1-7)”.
The default parameter value 4 is normal (+/- 0/8 exposure points). 7 means +3/8 exposure points from
the value you selected in AEC-CHAMBER X, SCREEN 0(1-80):...) and 1 means –3/8 exposure points.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the measured dose is in agreement with the values listed in the table.
4. Remove the detector of the dosemeter.

10.5.2.5.2 Fine Adjustment by measuring film density


1. Place a cassette with the selected film-screen-system and the corresponding film into the Bucky.
2. Take an exposure.
3. Process the film.
4. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
5. If the density does not lie within this interval correct the parameter value by using the buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 until density fits into the interval.
7. Change again the film tray for the detector of the dosemeter.
8. Take an exposure and log the measured value and the parameter value in the AEC's record.

9. Quit the menu by pressing

M
10. Use to select menu "SAVE AEC SETUP" and press .
The display shows the message: SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M':

M
11. To store the parameters press again.
After successfully storing the parameter values AEC SETUP DATA SAVED is displayed

Repeat the whole procedure for film-screen-system 1 and 2 (SCREEN1, SCREEN2), if necessary.

10.5.2.5.3 Beam quality


1. Place Phantom 4 (1 mm Cu) additionally to the collimator.
2. Take an exposure using the X-ray parameters 80kV, 100mAs, large focus.
3. Process the film and measure the film density.
Density must not differ more than 25% from the value without Cu phantom. If the deviation is larger
additional filtering must be installed on the tube.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-105
10.5.2.5.4 Correction of measuring fields
Taking three exposures using right, left or centre field the film density or the measured dose may differ from
each other. If this deviation exceeds 10% of the value found by using the central field, a correction should be
done. *This correction is not intended to be used for 5-field chambers.
Taking the value of 07 as default (no correction will be done) changing the parameter value by ±1
corresponds to a change of ±0,5 exposure points.

1. Put either the dosemeter detector or a cassette containing a film into the Bucky.
2. Select the central measuring field only.
3. Set X-ray parameters to 1-point technique, 80 kV.
4. Take an exposure.
5. Note the measured dose or the density, respectively.

6. Select "FIELD CORR. L(0-15)" with .


7. Select left hand measuring field only.
8. Take an exposure.
9. If the measured value deviates by more than ±10% from that one found in step 5 correct the parameter
cm cm
using and or enter the value directly.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until deviation is <10%.

11. Select "FIELD CORR. R(0-15)" using .


12. Select right hand field only.
13. Repeat steps 8. and 9. , until deviation is <10%.

14. Quit the menu by pressing .

M
15. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
16. The display shows the message: SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M':

M
17. Press again to save the values.
The message AEC SETUP DATA SAVED appears in the display.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-106
10.5.2.5.5 Orientation of the measuring field with respect to the direction of the beam
Depending on the application it may be necessary to swap the left measuring field for the right one using the
"FIELD SWAP(0,1):" menu. Figure 9-13: show the physical orientation of the used chambers. *For 5-field
chambers only fields 4 and 5 or 3 and 1 are swapped.

II III

linkes Meßfeld
rechtes Meßfeld
left-hand field
right-hand field

mittleres Meßfeld
central field

Figure 9-13: VACUTEC measuring chamber,


Orientation of the measuring fields in
direction of the beam

M
1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" by and press .
2. Select context menu "FIELD SWAP(0,1):".
3. Set parameter according to Figure 9-13:.

4. Quit menu by pressing .

M
5. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
6. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-107
10.5.2.5.6 Setting pulsed Exposure

M
1. Select "AEC-CHAMBER 1" by using and press .

2. Select "PULSED EXP. (0,1):" by using .


3. Set parameter value:
0 = single shots
1 = pulsed Exposure

4. Quit menu with .


M
5. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
6. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

To adjust the next measuring chamber repeat all steps of chapter 9.5.2.3.1.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-108
10.5.3 kV compensation

For each film-screen-system the film density depends on tube voltage in a different way. This influence must
be compensated to get sufficient images. Compensation is done in the menu "KV COMPENS., SCREEN n"
in the tube voltage interval from 40 kV to 150 kV within 8 steps. Please keep in mind the minimum and
maximum values for tube voltage which has been set during installation.

The compensation is given in % of the parameter set at 80 kV. This implies automatically that the value set
at 80 kV must be 100%.

Set the parameter for the tube voltage below and above 80 kV using the procedure described below.

10.5.3.1 Preparations
1. Remove the AL and Cu phantoms off the beam.
2. Place the phantoms 2 and 3 (100 mm water, 50 mm water) at the patient's position.
3. Select 1-point-technique.
4. Select central measuring field.
5. Select standard film-screen-system.

M
6. Select menu "KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0" using and press .

The display shows: KV COMPENS., SCREEN 0, 40KV(1-250%):

Note:
It is recommended to start the procedure at 80 kV. The parameter value is assumed to be 100% because all
previous adjustments were done at 80 kV.

If films are available, skip chapter 9.4.3.2, because there is a non-linear dependence of tube voltage, dose
and film density. 
At 40 kV there may occur a lot of faulty exposures. In this case it is recommended to extrapolate the values
instead of doing measurements.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-109
10.5.3.2 Pre-adjustment using Dose Measurements
1. Place the detector of the dosemeter instead of the film.

2. Select the voltage using the buttons and


3. Set the voltage on the control panel. 1-point technique , select central measurement field
4. Take an exposure, the AEC should terminate the exposure.
5. The measured dose should comply with the values listed in Table .
cm cm
6. Correct deviations by changing the value with the buttons and or enter the value directly.
7. Repeat steps 4. to 6. until the measured dose complies with the value from the table.

8. Select the next voltage step using .


9. Repeat steps 2. to 8. for each voltage.
10. Remove the detector of the dosemeter.

10.5.3.3 Fine Adjustment measuring film density


1. Insert a cassette with the selected film-screen-system and the corresponding film.

2. Select the voltage step using buttons and


3. Set the voltage on the control panel. 1-point technique, select central measurement field.
4. Take an exposure, the AEC should terminate the exposure.
5. Process the film.
6. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
7. If the density does not lie within the interval correct the parameter value by using the buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 until density fits into the interval.
9. Replace the cassette by the detector of the dosemeter.
10. Take an exposure and log the measured dose value and the parameter value
(kV-Compensation in %) in the AEC's record.

11. Select the next voltage step using .


12. Set the voltage on the control panel. 1-point technique , select central measurement field
13. Repeat steps 2 to 12 for all voltage steps.

14. Quit the menu by using .


M
15. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
16. Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
17. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

Repeat the steps of this chapter for film-screen-systems 1 and 2 (SCREEN 1, SCREEN2).

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-110
10.5.4 Safety termination
If a preset fraction between 1% and 50% of the dose is not achieved within 50 ms, the AEC terminates the
exposure instantaneously. If this parameter is set to the value 00, the safety termination is deactivated.

M
1. Select "DOSE TEST AFTER 50MS" using and press .
2. Set parameter to a value between 1% (01) and 50% (50).

3. Quit menu with .

M
4. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
5. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.5.5 Start phase

In case of very short exposure times the quality of the images may not be sufficient, especially if measuring
chambers with external preamplifier are used. In this case a correction factor may be set to compensate
effects at the beginning of the exposure in the menu START PHASE CORRECTION.

M
1. Select "START PHASE CORRECTION" using and press .
2. Set exposure parameters on the control panel: 3-point-technique, 80 kV, 5 ms.
3. Select central measurement field.
4. Insert the film, take an exposure and process the film.
5. Measure the density with the densitometer. Density must fit into the interval of 1.6 to 1.8.
cm
6. If the density does not lie within this interval correct the parameter value by using the buttons and
cm
, respectively, or enter the value directly.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 until density fits into the interval.

8. Quit menu by using .

M
9. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
10. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-111
10.5.6 Store Settings

1. Quit menu by using .

M
2. Select "SAVE AEC SETUP" using and press .
Message SAVE AEC SETUP, TO SAVE PUSH -> 'M': is displayed

M
3. To store values press again.
The display shows: AEC SETUP DATA SAVED

10.5.7 Setting normal mode

If all necessary steps are done to adjust the measuring chambers, the generator can be set back to normal
operation mode.

1. Switch off the generator.


2. Disconnect the service connector from the control panel and reconnect the hand switch .
3. Switch on the generator.

The generator starts the WARM UP and is ready for normal mode operation.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-112
10.5.8 AEC service settings via the setup program
The previously described settings can also be done via the setup program:

10.5.8.1 The “AEC service settings” menu item


The dialog to set up the automatic exposure control
Upon pressing the button „Read from AEC“ the current settings of the BA7 in the generator appear after the
data transfer from the Automatic Exposure Control board has been completed.

10.5.8.2 “Screen kV compensation (1-250%)”


Separated into 8 steps from 40 to 150 kV for up to five film-foil systems to compensate the kV for the film-foil
system and the measuring chamber
The range is from 1 to 250% (100% = non-compensated).

10.5.8.3 “Chamber settings”


Settings for each of the five available digital ionization chambers

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-113
10.5.8.3.1 “Screen 1 (1-80)”
The switch-off value for the first film-foil system in ½ AEC points

10.5.8.3.2 “Screen 2 (1-80)”


The switch-off value for the second film-foil system in ½ AEC points

10.5.8.3.3 “Screen 3 (1-80)”


The switch-off value for the third film-foil system in ½ AEC points

10.5.8.3.4 “Screen 4 (1-80)”


The switch-off value for the fourth film-foil system in ½ AEC points

10.5.8.3.5 “Screen 5 (1-80)”


The switch-off value for the fifth film-foil system in ½ AEC points

10.5.8.3.6 “Field l (0-15)”


Adapting the left ionization field in ½ AEC points (7 = neutral).

10.5.8.3.7 “Field r (0-15)”


Adapting the right ionization field in ½ AEC points (7 = neutral).

10.5.8.3.8 “Grey level (±3)”


Adapting the switch-off value in 1/8 AEC points. The switch-of values of all three film-foil systems are
affected.

10.5.8.3.9 “Field swap”


Swapping the left for the right ionization field. *For 5-field chambers only fields 4 and 5 or 3 and 1 are
swapped.

10.5.8.3.10 “Pulsed exp.”


Enables pulsed exposure.

10.5.8.3.11 “Integr. ch.”


Enables integrating ionization chambers (ionization chambers that supply a ramp corresponding to the
dosage at the output). Non-integrating ionization chambers supply a voltage level corresponding to the
dosage power.
In case of the digital AEC BA7 this check button is not used.

10.5.8.4 “Time corr. (0-2.0ms)”


Correcting the starting phase with an adjustable delay of 0 to 2 ms

10.5.8.5 “Dose test (0-50%)”


If the value set here is not 0, the dosage is compared with the expected final dosage after 50 ms of radiation.
An error message is generated if the measured dosage is less than the calculated percentage.
For instance, if the operator operates on the assumption that the exposure can be no more than 3 sec, then
50 ms are 1/60 of 3 sec. If 100% is divided by 60, you get a value less than 2. Therefore, 1% should be
typed in.

10.5.9 “Read from AEC”


Upload the AEC setup data from BA7.

10.5.10 “Write to AEC”


Download the AEC setup data to BA7 (this function overwrites the data in the E²Prom of BA7.)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-114
10.5.11 Error Messages

If errors occur during operation the messages "E034" to "E038" are displayed .

Display Explanation Reason Cause


E034 Exposure too long Termination on reaching the collimator is closed, exposure
max. allowed exposure time parameters (kV) too small

E035 Exposure too short exposure time <2ms Dose too high
E036 Exposure terminated The exposure has been e.g. user released the exposure
interrupted by an external button, the door to examination
cause room has been opened, dose too
low, exposure parameters in 2-
(mAs) or 3-point technique (ms)
chosen are too small ...
E037 Dose too low Safety termination at the collimator is closed, exposure
beginning of an exposure parameters (kV) too small, not
measuring anything
E038 delay between two series of exposures have
exposures too long been terminated (>3s)
Table 9-19: Error codes displayed on the control panel

No. V57 V35 V34 V33 Description


1 o Exposure too long (>3s)

2 o Exposure too short (<3ms)

3 o o Exposure terminated by user or EDITOR

4 o Exposure dose too low after 60ms

5 o o Pulsed exposure OFF (>3s)

6 o o ROM check sum failure

7 o o o RAM test failed

8 o No error, Exposure ends normal

9 o o power supply +5V faulty

10 o o power supply ± 15V faulty

11 o o o Not used with BA7

12 o o Not used with BA7


2
13 o o o E PROM check sum failure

14 o o o Watchdog

15 o o o o Not used

Table 9-20: Error LEDs on BA7

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-115
V49 V50
* * Transmitting data from BA7 to EDITOR Hfe via RS232 (not CAN)

V53 V54
* * Transmitting data from BA7 to MP15/16 (not used / *not available on BA7 type B)

V110 ° + 15V OK

V48 ° + 5V OK

V37 ° NOT signal indication

V36 ° BUS signal indication

V38 ° LOA6 signal indication

* = blinking LED, ° = LED on

Table 9-21: LEDs on BA7

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-116
Figure 9-14: BA7 type A

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-117
Figure 9-15: BA7 type B

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-118
10.6 The Control Interface Board with Mini Console

Introduction:
The interface board provides GUI control of the system via either Ethernet or Serial communications.
For Ethernet the default IP Address of the board is 192.168.1.4.
The computer initially needs the IP Address set to 192.168.1.10:
• Control Panel
• Device Manager
• Ethernet: Change IP Address to 192.168.1.10
The interface also allows the use of an optional HSS2 control module.
TOP VIEW

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-119
10.6.1 Connector Interface

No. Pins Function Description


JB2 9 Interface for RS232 9 position female “D” connector.
communications. Pin Signal description
BAUD SETTINGS: 1/4/6/7/ Not in use.
8/9
115.2K 2 RS232: RX
Parity: NONE 3 RS2323: TX
5 Return for RS232
Shell Ground

JB9 14 Optional Configurable 14 position dual in line connector, 0.1” center. This connector has
Interface. unused I/O’s which can be configured as required.
Pin Signal description
NOTE: This is not in use.
1 Relay 1: N.O. contactor
2 Relay 1: Common
3 Relay 1: N.C. contactor
4 Spare
5 Open Drain Output
6 Open Drain Output
7/12/13 Not Used
/14
8 Control Input
9 Control Input
10 Control Input
11 Open Drain Output
JB10 8 Ethernet Connector 8 position RJ-45 connector, Standard Ethernet connection
The default IP Address of the board is 192.168.1.4

JB13 10 Mini-Console Interface 10 position dual in line connector, 4.20mm center. “Mini-Fir Jr.” series
for generator control.
Pin Signal description
1 Power On Command
2 Prep On Indicator, LED Driver
3 Exposure On Indicator, LED Driver
4 Power on Indicator, LED Driver
5 Ground
6 Power Off Command
7 Prep On Command
8 Exposure On Command
9 +12V Standby
10 Buzzer

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-120
10.6.2 Jumper Interface
No. Pins Signal Default Description
setting
JP1 2 RS232, (JB1) Opened Not in use
JP2 2 RS232, (JB2) Opened RS232 auto power down function
JP3 2 CAN_L CAN_H Closed CAN Termination
JP4 2 Boot Loader Reset Opened For future implementation to reset the boot loader.
JP5 2 JTAG Reset Opened Not in use
JP6 2 Serial Option Opened Not in use

SIDE VIEW

10.6.3 LED indication Interface


No. Color Signal Function Description
DS1-Top Red Error Indicates a fault has occurred LED on indicates communication error.
DS1-Center Green Prep Indicates Prep has been initiated Prepares unit for exposure
DS1-Bottom Yellow High Voltage On Indicates High Voltage to the High Voltage in on. Exposure in
tube is ON process.
DS2-Top Green POWER ON Indicates power is supplied to Bd. Powered by the +3.3V regulated supply.
DS2-Center Yellow Ethernet Speed Indicates communication type: Indicator Off = 10M
10M/100M data bits. Indicator On = 100M
DS2-Bottom Yellow NWAYEN Ethernet Link Status Indicator Off = No Link
LED On = Link
LED Flashing = Communication Activity
DS3-Top Green COMMS RS232 communications are ok For future implementation. LED on
indicates RS232 is OK.
DS3-Center Yellow HB Heart Beat Indicates processor is working, flashes
at 2Hz rate.
DS3-Bottom Yellow UPGD For future implementation
DS4 Green System Power On Indicates power to the system is
on

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-121
10.6.4 Test points Interface
No. Signal Description
TP1 +24V +24V supplied to power the interface board.
TP3 +6.8V Unregulated source supply for for +5V regulated supply.
TP4 VREF OUT =3.0Vdc A/D reference.
TP5 +5V Regulated bias supply.
TP6 +16V Bias supply for PWM power supply IC.
TP7 +5VF Floating bias supply used for RS232. The return is “FGND”.
TP8 REL_HOLD
TP9 Y2 250MHz clock.
TP10 PWR_ON Edge Triggered: Rising Edge turns on the Generator Power via the Mini
Console.
TP11 PWR_OFF Edge Triggered: Falling Edge turns off the Generator Power via the Mini
Console
TP12 PREP LO = Generator has started in preparation mode via hand held mini console.
Signal stays HI until completion of an exposure.
TP13 12V_STBY +12V required to use the hand held mini console. 0V disables use of mini
console.
TP14 POWER ON IND +12VF is sourced out to indicate power is on the generator. This is a floating
voltage and the return is FGND.
TP15 POWER_ON_IND Control for “POWER ON IND”. HI = ON
TP16 BUZZER
TP17 RX_232 RS232
TP18 TX_232z RS232
TP19 +3.3V Regulated Bias Supply
TP20 +12V Regulated Bias Supply

10.6.5 Switch Interface


No. Value Description
SW1 N.O. For future implementation. IP Reset to initial value.

10.6.6 Fuses Interface


No. Value Description
F1 80mA Resettable Fuse for the external Power On Indicator
PTC
F2 1.1A Resettable +24V Input Supply Voltage
PTC

Interface Board Setup: The unit will have 2, 3, 4 or 5 cables connected depending on the options and
configuration. If the interface needs to be replaced or moved, note which cables are installed prior to
removing them. When the interface is reinstalled connect the required cables back in.
1. JB2: RS232 interface. Optional.
2. JB6: Power and communication for interface board. This connector is always present.
3. JB10: Ethernet. Optional.
4. JB12: HSS. Optional.
5. JB13: Mini Console Interface. Optional.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-122
The Mini Console must be connected to JB13 prior to inserting the interface board into the system. This
connector is not accessible when the interface is installed.

JB12

JB10

JB6

JB2

10.7 IFC1 Interface Board and ZST2 Configuration/ setting


The ZST2 Start up time must be set to 9 seconds when the Control Interface board is used. This delay is
required to setup the communication interface. See the configuration setting below.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-123
JB2: RS232
Option

JB6
Connection to
Operating console

JB10: Ethernet
Option (OEM)

JB12: HSS2
Option

Interface Board IFC1

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-124
Set to 9 Seconds for
Interface Board

Generator can be controlled from the GUI interface with the Mini Console Control Interface.

IFC1 Interface Board Settings via Service GUI:


The RS-232 and Ethernet connections are setup thru the “Conn” button on the GUI

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-125
The Connection Select dialog box will open and can be set for Serial RS232 as shown above. Click the
connect button when finished. (For Interface Box the baud rate is 38400)
“OR”

The Connection Select dialog box is set for Ethernet when set as above. Click the connect button when
finished.
After the communication interface has been established the GUI control need to be set for Black Box mode
or Control Desk mode. This is set by clicking the “Oper” box as shown below.

A Service Password is required to access the Operation Mode Change function. After the “Oper” box is
clicked the Password request box will open as follows:

Enter the Service password: hfeS3rv1c3 and click OK when finished

The Operations Settings dialog box will open and the operation mode can be selected.(Black Box Mode
emulates Interface Box)

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-126
“OR”

Select and click the “Done” box when finished.(Control Desk Mode is not in use)

Additional Display Options:


• Status Message as Comms Trafic-Not in use for internal communication debugging.
• Query Heat Integrator- When checked will display Heat Units
• Query DAP- When checked will display DAP value after exposure

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-127
10.1 Mini Console Configuration Jumper
A three wire Jumper is required to properly configure the Mini Console to the Interface Board. The Jumper
part number is 305258-001. The jumper needs to be set between JB16 and JB17. Connect the jumper as
shown below:

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-128
10.2 Mini Control Console Interface
Introduction: The hand held “Mini Console” interface is used to manually do exposures.
The Mini Console supports the following functions:
• System Power On
• System Power Off
• Prep System
• Initiate Exposure
There is also an internal audio buzzer in the Mini Console. This is used to indicate when an exposure is
completed and when a fault occurs.
Switches: There are four switches on the Mini Console.
1. Power On: Turns power to the system on.
2. Power Off: Turns power to the system off.
3. Initiate Prep: Preps the system for an exposure.
4. Start Exposure: Turns on high voltage to the X-Ray tube.

1. Power ON 2. Power OFF


Button Button

3. Preparation 4. Exposure
(PREP)Button Button

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-129
Indicators: There are three indicators on the Mini Console.
1. Power On: Indicates the system power is on.
2. Prep: Indicates the Prep has been initiated.
3. Exposure: Indicates High Voltage is on and X-Rays are being generated.

1. Power On

3. X-rays On

2. Prep On

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-130
Mini Console Operation: The Mini Console is also available with an optional Hand Held Exposure Switch.

Optional Hand
Held Exposure
Switch

Mini Console:
1. Push and hold down the Prep button. The Prep indicator will flash on/off. When Prep is completed,
the indicator will stay on in a steady state.

2. While still holding the Prep button down, push down on the exposure button. The exposure indicator
will illuminate and an audible noise sounds. After exposure is completed both indicators will turn off.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-131
Hand Held Exposure Switch:
1. Push the switch to the first step. The Prep indicator will flash on/off. When Prep is completed, the
indicator will stay on in a steady state.

2 Once the Prep is completed, push the switch completely down. The exposure indicator will
illuminate. After exposure is completed both indicators will turn off

10.3 The high speed starter HSS2


The high speed starter HSS2
Important information

Warning!

The high-speed starter works with dangerous high voltages. The capacitors are still
charged, after turning off the generator

The discharge of the capacitors on the HSS 2 module needs at least 150s after switch-
off. NOTE: There is a Neon Lamp, DS1 located on the power board. Never service the
unit if this lamp is illuminated.

The capacitors must be discharged before the hardware settings can be changed.

It is absolutely essential to ensure that the tube is not rotating on high speed, if the
generator is turned off.

An uncontrolled deceleration of the anode can cause damage to the bearings or glass
of insert thereby damaging the tube.

- The high-speed starter HSS2 works only with tubes that are listed in the compatibility list.
- The connection of non-listed X-ray tubes is not permitted or require prior consultation with the
Spellman GmbH Bochum

- The operator should limit the high-speed starts to 2 per minute, to protect the connected X-ray tube.

- All hardware settings on the High speed starter module and the tube settings in the Generator setup
must be set to comply with the connected x-ray tube before switching on.

Verify:

o Stator voltage
o Start time
o Brake time
o Anode data at 180Hz
o Maximum tube current

Wrong settings can damage the tube or the high-speed starter.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-132
The stator connecting cable must be designed to fulfill the following minimum requirements:

Shielded cable: Shield connected on both sides


Voltage rating: Minimum 1000V
Conductor cross-section: Minimum 1,5mm²
Number of wires: 4 (U,V,W and PE)

A stator cable can be ordered at Spellman GmbH Bochum

10.3.1 Function description


The high-speed starter consists of a frequency inverter, a control unit and a power supply. It is used to drive
rotating anode X-ray tubes that are equipped with a two-phase or a three-phase induction motor. The
frequency inverter consists of a six pack IGBT bridge. The microprocessor unit “MP16” controls the high-
speed starter, which is connected to the internal CAN bus of the generator.

Types of operation:

- Rotation during fluoroscopy


o 33Hz anode start lasting a second.
o 33Hz drive to maintain the rotation during fluoroscopy.

- Rotation speeds during Boost:


o 60/150/180Hz anode start lasting 1 to 3s depending on tube characteristics and Exposure
Parameters.

- Continuous running after exposure (only for HSS1 at the moment):


o High speed rotation, variable between 0s and 30s
o 60/150/180Hz programmable during preparation.

- Anode braking(Only from High Speed Mode)


o 3s – 6s deceleration of the anode rotation below 3000 RPM.

The timer of continuous running will be started again on each exposure.

The high speed starter will reduce the rotor speed to below 3000 RPM after the end of the continuous
running interval has been reached or if the preparation is stopped during the high speed start time.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-133
10.3.2 Overview of the hardware

10.3.2.1 Overview of the high speed starter module

Top View

ASSY 460087-002 REV B[ ]

+
1
3

REV. B[ ]

JB4
-
S/S, REV. B

JB5
POWER
POLE
CONNECTO
RS

BUS Voltage: Power Pole Connectors


Pin Wire / Connector Color Function
1 RED +BUS Voltage
2 BLACK Return

JB4: 6 Position, 0.156” Center


Pin Function Description
1 +24V +24Vdc Input Power
2 GND Return for Input Power
3 B1 Not Used
4 RESET Clears Faults
5 B0 Enables HSS
6 /FAULT Open Collector: Goes Low With Fault

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-134
JB5: 9 Position “D” Connector
Pin Function Description
1 HSS2 SPEED Not used. For future implementation
SELECT
2/3/5/6/7/8 Not Used
4 CANH CAN bus Interface
9 CANL CAN bus Interface

10.3.2.2 Rear View

TB1 PINS:
1 2 3 4

TB1: External connection to the X-Ray Tube Anode Motor. Use ring lugs TE Connectivity, PN 320634 or
equivalent.

TB1: 2 Phase Motor Connection


Pin Name Function
1 COMMON Common connection
2 PHASE Aux. winding of stator
3 MAIN Main winding of stator
4 GND Common connection

TB1: 3 Phase Motor Connection

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-135
Pin Name Function
1 W-PHASE W Phase Winding
2 V-PHASE V Phase Winding
3 U-PHASE U Phase Winding
4 GND Tube Ground

10.3.3 Overview of the PCB HSS2

10.3.3.1 Light emitting diodes LED

LED Number Color Function


DS1-Top Red General Fault Indicator. See Error Handling For fault
descriptions
DS1-Middle Green Power On Indicator
DS1-Bottm Yellow Flashes when the HSS2 is on.
Repetition Rates:
Boost Mode = 10Hz
Run Mode = 2.5Hz
Brake Mode = 0.6Hz

10.3.3.2 Switches

Switch Function
Number
W1 the microprocessor

10.3.3.3 Jumpers

Jumper Default Function


JP1 Closed For Factory Programming
JP2 Open I/O Setup. Not Used.
JP3 Closed CAN Bus Termination

10.3.3.4 Test points

TP Signal Function
TP1 +3.3V Bias Supply
TP2 +15V Supply Control signal of the Inverter IGBT V2 and V3
TP3 GND Ground
TP4 +5V Bias Supply

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-136
TP5 GND Ground

10.3.4 Assembly of the HSS2 module


The main distribution of the x-ray generator must be prepared for the assembly of the high-speed starter.
The HSS2 will be switched on with the contact of contactor K1

The HSS2 will mount on the


four highlighted studs.
Place HSS2 on the mounting
studs and secure with the
rotating clinch nuts.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-137
Connect the power
connectors 3 pole
connections, (VBUS) together
and dress as shown.
Danger High Voltage: This
connection must be done
after power off and confirming
no voltage on connector pins
1 and 3.(Power module side)

Insert the 9 pin “D” connector


into JB5 on the HSS2 board.
Tighten the two screws to
secure.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-138
Plug the six position
connector into JB4.

Remove the two screws


holding the terminal block
cover. Wire the anode motor
to the terminal block and
replace the terminal block
cover. The connections to the
tube must be connected
based on manufacture spec.

The HSS2 now needs to be configured for the connected X-Ray tube.

10.3.5 Device settings


The HSS2 now needs to be configured for the connected X-Ray tube. The tube models available will be
listed. If the required tube is not listed, consult the manufacturer.
First you have to set the High-Speed Option in the service software: Conf32_svc_V416rXX.exe

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-139
Click on and open the “HFE” GUI.
“HFE” GUI will open. GUI will say “System Off”.

Turn on MAINS. Enable power to the system via the the Mini-Console. In ≈10 seconds the GUI will read
“System Functional”. The Status indicator will change from Blue to Green.

The unit will finish the startup sequence in ≈6 seconds. The GUI will then be displayed as shown.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-140
Click on the “HSS” icon to open the “SHV High Speed Starter Setting” dialog box.

Enter the Service password: hfeS3rv1c3

Click on the pull-down menu “HSS Setting Name”

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-141
The available tubes will be listed. Click on the desired X-Ray tube. If tube selection is correct, click on the
“Send” button.

Click on the “Done” button, programming is now complete.

The “Success” dialog box should open. Click on the “OK” button.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-142
10.3.6 Error handling
The high-speed starter has it’s an own hardware monitoring which will protect the connected tubes.
The hardware monitoring controls the parameter in the idle mode and during the tube start and brake. Each
detected error will be displayed on the HFE GUI with the appropriate error message. The error LED on the
PCB of the high-speed starter is general to all faults.

10.3.6.1 Error Status LED


If an error is detected the Fault LED, (DS1-Top) will come on. The error message is displayed on the HFE
GUI in the Status box.

Possible causes of error with HSS2:

- The anode motor is not connected properly. One or more of the leads is not connected.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-143
o Check the connections at the HSS2. Refer to the installation section.

- The cable connection from the stator to the HSS2 is incorrect.

o Measure the resistance of the stator windings at the tube side


example:
On the tube side Resistance
Main phase – common (W – V) 20 Ohm
Shift phase – common (U – V) 50 Ohm
Main phase – Shift phase (W – U) 70 Ohm

o Measure the resistance of the stator windings at the cable side at the connector to the high
speed starter
example:
On the cable side at the connector Resistance
W – V (between Pin 2 and 3) 21 Ohm
U – V (between Pin 1 and 3) 51 Ohm
U – W (between Pin 1 and 2) 72 Ohm

- Broken stator cable.


o Change the cable. Never repair the broken cable.
- Tube with high stator impedance. Unknown tube and stator type.
o Confer with Spellman GmbH Bochum.
- Tubes have a thermo contact inside of the stator windings which open when the stator is at a
temperature above 70°C.
o Wait until the tube is cooled down.
o The most tube manufacturers allow 2 high-speed starts per minute.

10.4 Line Input Board 480V


Line Input Board 480V configuration

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-144
10.5 The Aux-transformer option
Aux-transformer configuration
The aux transformer option allows for a second AC power output that has an isolated/non isolated winding
for additional auxiliary power for external use.

Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX


EDITOR HFe page 10-145
Service Manual X-Ray Generator HFE SERVICE MANUAL.DOCX
EDITOR HFe page 10-146

You might also like